2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
<!doctype linuxdoc system>
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<article>
|
|
|
|
<title>ca65 Users Guide
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
<author><url url="mailto:uz@cc65.org" name="Ullrich von Bassewitz">,<newline>
|
|
|
|
<url url="mailto:greg.king5@verizon.net" name="Greg King">
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<abstract>
|
2015-07-29 10:55:50 +00:00
|
|
|
ca65 is a powerful macro assembler for the 6502, 65C02, and 65816 CPUs. It is
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
used as a companion assembler for the cc65 crosscompiler, but it may also be
|
|
|
|
used as a standalone product.
|
|
|
|
</abstract>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- Table of contents -->
|
|
|
|
<toc>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<!-- Begin the document -->
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect>Overview<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
ca65 is a replacement for the ra65 assembler that was part of the cc65 C
|
|
|
|
compiler, originally developed by John R. Dunning. I had some problems with
|
|
|
|
ra65 and the copyright does not permit some things which I wanted to be
|
|
|
|
possible, so I decided to write a completely new assembler/linker/archiver
|
|
|
|
suite for the cc65 compiler. ca65 is part of this suite.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some parts of the assembler (code generation and some routines for symbol
|
|
|
|
table handling) are taken from an older crossassembler named a816 written
|
|
|
|
by me a long time ago.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Design criteria<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here's a list of the design criteria, that I considered important for the
|
|
|
|
development:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<itemize>
|
|
|
|
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
<item> The assembler must support macros. Macros are not essential, but they
|
|
|
|
make some things easier, especially when you use the assembler in the
|
|
|
|
backend of a compiler.
|
|
|
|
<item> The assembler must support the newer 65C02 and 65816 CPUs. I have been
|
|
|
|
thinking about a 65816 backend for the C compiler, and even my old
|
|
|
|
a816 assembler had support for these CPUs, so this wasn't really a
|
|
|
|
problem.
|
|
|
|
<item> The assembler must produce relocatable code. This is necessary for the
|
|
|
|
compiler support, and it is more convenient.
|
|
|
|
<item> Conditional assembly must be supported. This is a must for bigger
|
|
|
|
projects written in assembler (like Elite128).
|
|
|
|
<item> The assembler must support segments, and it must support more than
|
|
|
|
three segments (this is the count, most other assemblers support).
|
|
|
|
Having more than one code segments helps developing code for systems
|
|
|
|
with a divided ROM area (like the C64).
|
|
|
|
<item> The linker must be able to resolve arbitrary expressions. It should
|
|
|
|
be able to get things like
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.import S1, S2
|
|
|
|
.export Special
|
|
|
|
Special = 2*S1 + S2/7
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
right.
|
|
|
|
<item> True lexical nesting for symbols. This is very convenient for larger
|
|
|
|
assembly projects.
|
|
|
|
<item> "Cheap" local symbols without lexical nesting for those quick, late
|
|
|
|
night hacks.
|
|
|
|
<item> I liked the idea of "options" as Anre Fachats .o65 format has it, so I
|
|
|
|
introduced the concept into the object file format use by the new cc65
|
|
|
|
binutils.
|
|
|
|
<item> The assembler will be a one pass assembler. There was no real need for
|
|
|
|
this decision, but I've written several multipass assemblers, and it
|
|
|
|
started to get boring. A one pass assembler needs much more elaborated
|
|
|
|
data structures, and because of that it's much more fun:-)
|
|
|
|
<item> Non-GPLed code that may be used in any project without restrictions or
|
|
|
|
fear of "GPL infecting" other code.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</itemize>
|
|
|
|
<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect>Usage<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Command line option overview<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The assembler accepts the following options:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
Usage: ca65 [options] file
|
|
|
|
Short options:
|
|
|
|
-D name[=value] Define a symbol
|
|
|
|
-I dir Set an include directory search path
|
|
|
|
-U Mark unresolved symbols as import
|
|
|
|
-V Print the assembler version
|
|
|
|
-W n Set warning level n
|
|
|
|
-d Debug mode
|
|
|
|
-g Add debug info to object file
|
|
|
|
-h Help (this text)
|
|
|
|
-i Ignore case of symbols
|
|
|
|
-l name Create a listing file if assembly was ok
|
|
|
|
-mm model Set the memory model
|
|
|
|
-o name Name the output file
|
|
|
|
-s Enable smart mode
|
|
|
|
-t sys Set the target system
|
|
|
|
-v Increase verbosity
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Long options:
|
|
|
|
--auto-import Mark unresolved symbols as import
|
|
|
|
--bin-include-dir dir Set a search path for binary includes
|
|
|
|
--cpu type Set cpu type
|
|
|
|
--create-dep name Create a make dependency file
|
|
|
|
--create-full-dep name Create a full make dependency file
|
|
|
|
--debug Debug mode
|
|
|
|
--debug-info Add debug info to object file
|
|
|
|
--feature name Set an emulation feature
|
|
|
|
--help Help (this text)
|
|
|
|
--ignore-case Ignore case of symbols
|
|
|
|
--include-dir dir Set an include directory search path
|
|
|
|
--large-alignment Don't warn about large alignments
|
|
|
|
--listing name Create a listing file if assembly was ok
|
|
|
|
--list-bytes n Maximum number of bytes per listing line
|
|
|
|
--memory-model model Set the memory model
|
|
|
|
--pagelength n Set the page length for the listing
|
2023-08-19 19:50:22 +00:00
|
|
|
--relax-checks Disables some error checks
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
--smart Enable smart mode
|
|
|
|
--target sys Set the target system
|
|
|
|
--verbose Increase verbosity
|
|
|
|
--version Print the assembler version
|
2023-02-21 03:24:26 +00:00
|
|
|
--warnings-as-errors Treat warnings as errors
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Command line options in detail<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here is a description of all the command line options:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<descrip>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option--bin-include-dir">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>--bin-include-dir dir</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Name a directory which is searched for binary include files. The option
|
|
|
|
may be used more than once to specify more than one directory to search. The
|
|
|
|
current directory is always searched first before considering any
|
|
|
|
additional directories. See also the section about <ref id="search-paths"
|
|
|
|
name="search paths">.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option--cpu">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>--cpu type</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Set the default for the CPU type. The option takes a parameter, which
|
|
|
|
may be one of
|
|
|
|
|
2020-11-10 09:32:29 +00:00
|
|
|
6502, 6502X, 6502DTV, 65SC02, 65C02, 65816, sweet16, HuC6280, 4510
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option-create-dep">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>--create-dep name</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Tells the assembler to generate a file containing the dependency list for
|
|
|
|
the assembled module in makefile syntax. The output is written to a file
|
|
|
|
with the given name. The output does not include files passed via debug
|
|
|
|
information to the assembler.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option-create-full-dep">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>--create-full-dep name</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Tells the assembler to generate a file containing the dependency list for
|
|
|
|
the assembled module in makefile syntax. The output is written to a file
|
|
|
|
with the given name. The output does include files passed via debug
|
|
|
|
information to the assembler.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>-d, --debug</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enables debug mode, something that should not be needed for mere
|
|
|
|
mortals:-)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option--feature">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>--feature name</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enable an emulation feature. This is identical as using <tt/.FEATURE/
|
|
|
|
in the source with two exceptions: Feature names must be lower case, and
|
2023-02-21 09:00:34 +00:00
|
|
|
each feature must be specified by using a separate <tt/--feature/ option,
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
comma separated lists are not allowed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See the discussion of the <tt><ref id=".FEATURE" name=".FEATURE"></tt>
|
|
|
|
command for a list of emulation features.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option-g">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>-g, --debug-info</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When this option (or the equivalent control command <tt/.DEBUGINFO/) is
|
|
|
|
used, the assembler will add a section to the object file that contains
|
|
|
|
all symbols (including local ones) together with the symbol values and
|
|
|
|
source file positions. The linker will put these additional symbols into
|
|
|
|
the VICE label file, so even local symbols can be seen in the VICE
|
|
|
|
monitor.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option-h">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>-h, --help</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Print the short option summary shown above.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option-i">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>-i, --ignore-case</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This option makes the assembler case insensitive on identifiers and labels.
|
|
|
|
This option will override the default, but may itself be overridden by the
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".CASE" name=".CASE"></tt> control command.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option-l">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>-l name, --listing name</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Generate an assembler listing with the given name. A listing file will
|
|
|
|
never be generated in case of assembly errors.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option--large-alignment">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>--large-alignment</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Disable warnings about a large combined alignment. See the discussion of the
|
2020-05-16 01:09:02 +00:00
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".ALIGN" name=".ALIGN"></tt> directive for further information.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option--list-bytes">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>--list-bytes n</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Set the maximum number of bytes printed in the listing for one line of
|
|
|
|
input. See the <tt><ref id=".LISTBYTES" name=".LISTBYTES"></tt> directive
|
|
|
|
for more information. The value zero can be used to encode an unlimited
|
|
|
|
number of printed bytes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option-mm">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>-mm model, --memory-model model</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define the default memory model. Possible model specifiers are near, far and
|
|
|
|
huge.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option-o">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>-o name</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The default output name is the name of the input file with the extension
|
|
|
|
replaced by ".o". If you don't like that, you may give another name with
|
|
|
|
the -o option. The output file will be placed in the same directory as
|
|
|
|
the source file, or, if -o is given, the full path in this name is used.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option--pagelength">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>--pagelength n</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
sets the length of a listing page in lines. See the <tt><ref
|
|
|
|
id=".PAGELENGTH" name=".PAGELENGTH"></tt> directive for more information.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option--relax-checks">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>--relax-checks</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
2023-08-19 19:39:51 +00:00
|
|
|
Disables some error checks done by the assembler. This will allow code that is an
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
error in most cases and flagged as such by the assembler, but can be valid
|
|
|
|
in special situations.
|
|
|
|
|
2023-08-19 19:39:51 +00:00
|
|
|
Disabled checks are:
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<itemize>
|
2023-08-19 19:39:51 +00:00
|
|
|
<item>Address vs. fragment size: a byte sized load from an non-zeropage
|
|
|
|
address is truncated instead of producing an error.
|
|
|
|
<item>Indirect jump on page boundary: <tt>jmp (label)</tt> on a label that
|
|
|
|
resides on a page boundary (<tt>$xxFF</tt>) fetches the second byte from the
|
|
|
|
wrong address on 6502 CPUs, now allowed instead of producing an error.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</itemize>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option-s">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>-s, --smart-mode</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In smart mode (enabled by -s or the <tt><ref id=".SMART" name=".SMART"></tt>
|
|
|
|
pseudo instruction) the assembler will track usage of the <tt/REP/ and
|
|
|
|
<tt/SEP/ instructions in 65816 mode and update the operand sizes
|
|
|
|
accordingly. If the operand of such an instruction cannot be evaluated by
|
|
|
|
the assembler (for example, because the operand is an imported symbol), a
|
|
|
|
warning is issued.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Beware: Since the assembler cannot trace the execution flow this may
|
|
|
|
lead to false results in some cases. If in doubt, use the .ixx and .axx
|
|
|
|
instructions to tell the assembler about the current settings. Smart
|
|
|
|
mode is off by default.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option-t">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>-t sys, --target sys</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Set the target system. This will enable translation of character strings and
|
|
|
|
character constants into the character set of the target platform. The
|
|
|
|
default for the target system is "none", which means that no translation
|
|
|
|
will take place. The assembler supports the same target systems as the
|
|
|
|
compiler, see there for a list.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depending on the target, the default CPU type is also set. This can be
|
2021-12-14 12:13:16 +00:00
|
|
|
overridden by using the <tt/<ref id="option--cpu" name="--cpu">/ option.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option-v">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>-v, --verbose</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Increase the assembler verbosity. Usually only needed for debugging
|
|
|
|
purposes. You may use this option more than one time for even more
|
|
|
|
verbose output.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option-D">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>-D</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This option allows you to define symbols on the command line. Without a
|
|
|
|
value, the symbol is defined with the value zero. When giving a value,
|
|
|
|
you may use the '$' prefix for hexadecimal symbols. Please note
|
|
|
|
that for some operating systems, '$' has a special meaning, so
|
|
|
|
you may have to quote the expression.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option-I">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>-I dir, --include-dir dir</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Name a directory which is searched for include files. The option may be
|
|
|
|
used more than once to specify more than one directory to search. The
|
|
|
|
current directory is always searched first before considering any
|
|
|
|
additional directories. See also the section about <ref id="search-paths"
|
|
|
|
name="search paths">.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option-U">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>-U, --auto-import</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Mark symbols that are not defined in the sources as imported symbols. This
|
|
|
|
should be used with care since it delays error messages about typos and such
|
|
|
|
until the linker is run. The compiler uses the equivalent of this switch
|
|
|
|
(<tt><ref id=".AUTOIMPORT" name=".AUTOIMPORT"></tt>) to enable auto imported
|
|
|
|
symbols for the runtime library. However, the compiler is supposed to
|
|
|
|
generate code that runs through the assembler without problems, something
|
|
|
|
which is not always true for assembler programmers.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option-V">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>-V, --version</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Print the version number of the assembler. If you send any suggestions
|
|
|
|
or bugfixes, please include the version number.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option-W">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>-Wn</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Set the warning level for the assembler. Using -W2 the assembler will
|
|
|
|
even warn about such things like unused imported symbols. The default
|
|
|
|
warning level is 1, and it would probably be silly to set it to
|
|
|
|
something lower.
|
|
|
|
|
2023-02-21 03:24:26 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="option--warnings-as-errors">
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>--warnings-as-errors</tt></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
An error will be generated if any warnings were produced.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</descrip>
|
|
|
|
<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect>Search paths<label id="search-paths"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Normal include files are searched in the following places:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<enum>
|
2014-02-04 21:51:39 +00:00
|
|
|
<item>The current file's directory.
|
|
|
|
<item>Any directory added with the <tt/<ref id="option-I" name="-I">/ option
|
|
|
|
on the command line.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<item>The value of the environment variable <tt/CA65_INC/ if it is defined.
|
|
|
|
<item>A subdirectory named <tt/asminc/ of the directory defined in the
|
|
|
|
environment variable <tt/CC65_HOME/, if it is defined.
|
2014-02-04 21:51:39 +00:00
|
|
|
<item>An optionally compiled-in directory.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</enum>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Binary include files are searched in the following places:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<enum>
|
2014-02-04 21:51:39 +00:00
|
|
|
<item>The current file's directory.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<item>Any directory added with the <tt/<ref id="option--bin-include-dir"
|
|
|
|
name="--bin-include-dir">/ option on the command line.
|
|
|
|
</enum>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect>Input format<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Assembler syntax<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The assembler accepts the standard 6502/65816 assembler syntax. One line may
|
|
|
|
contain a label (which is identified by a colon), and, in addition to the
|
|
|
|
label, an assembler mnemonic, a macro, or a control command (see section <ref
|
|
|
|
id="control-commands" name="Control Commands"> for supported control
|
|
|
|
commands). Alternatively, the line may contain a symbol definition using
|
|
|
|
the '=' token. Everything after a semicolon is handled as a comment (that is,
|
|
|
|
it is ignored).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here are some examples for valid input lines:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
Label: ; A label and a comment
|
|
|
|
lda #$20 ; A 6502 instruction plus comment
|
|
|
|
L1: ldx #$20 ; Same with label
|
|
|
|
L2: .byte "Hello world" ; Label plus control command
|
|
|
|
mymac $20 ; Macro expansion
|
|
|
|
MySym = 3*L1 ; Symbol definition
|
|
|
|
MaSym = Label ; Another symbol
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The assembler accepts
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<itemize>
|
|
|
|
<item>all valid 6502 mnemonics when in 6502 mode (the default or after the
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".P02" name=".P02"></tt> command was given).
|
|
|
|
<item>all valid 6502 mnemonics plus a set of illegal instructions when in
|
|
|
|
<ref id="6502X-mode" name="6502X mode">.
|
2020-11-16 21:16:14 +00:00
|
|
|
<item>all valid 6502DTV mnemonics when in 6502DTV mode (after the
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".PDTV" name=".PDTV"></tt> command was given).
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<item>all valid 65SC02 mnemonics when in 65SC02 mode (after the
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".PSC02" name=".PSC02"></tt> command was given).
|
|
|
|
<item>all valid 65C02 mnemonics when in 65C02 mode (after the
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".PC02" name=".PC02"></tt> command was given).
|
2016-09-07 17:21:24 +00:00
|
|
|
<item>all valid 65816 mnemonics when in 65816 mode (after the
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".P816" name=".P816"></tt> command was given).
|
2016-09-07 17:21:24 +00:00
|
|
|
<item>all valid 4510 mnemonics when in 4510 mode (after the
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".P4510" name=".P4510"></tt> command was given).
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</itemize>
|
|
|
|
|
2023-02-25 04:00:30 +00:00
|
|
|
On 6502-derived platforms the <tt/BRK/ instruction has an optional signature
|
|
|
|
byte. If omitted, the assembler will only produce only 1 byte.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
brk ; 1-byte: $00
|
|
|
|
brk $34 ; 2-bytes: $00 $34
|
2023-02-25 13:23:47 +00:00
|
|
|
brk #$34 ; 2-bytes: $00 $34
|
2023-02-25 04:00:30 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>65816 mode<p>
|
|
|
|
|
2015-07-29 10:55:50 +00:00
|
|
|
In 65816 mode, several aliases are accepted, in addition to the official
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
mnemonics:
|
|
|
|
|
2016-08-29 08:45:18 +00:00
|
|
|
<itemize>
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>CPA</tt> is an alias for <tt>CMP</tt>
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>DEA</tt> is an alias for <tt>DEC A</tt>
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>INA</tt> is an alias for <tt>INC A</tt>
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>SWA</tt> is an alias for <tt>XBA</tt>
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>TAD</tt> is an alias for <tt>TCD</tt>
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>TAS</tt> is an alias for <tt>TCS</tt>
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>TDA</tt> is an alias for <tt>TDC</tt>
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>TSA</tt> is an alias for <tt>TSC</tt>
|
|
|
|
</itemize>
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2023-02-25 04:00:30 +00:00
|
|
|
The <tt/MVN/ and <tt/MVP/ instructions accept two different argument forms.
|
|
|
|
Either two bank bytes may be given with a <tt/#/ prefix,
|
|
|
|
or two far addresses whose high byte will be used.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
mvn #^src, #^dst ; bank of src to bank of dst
|
|
|
|
mvn src, dst ; bank of src to bank of dst
|
|
|
|
mvp #$12, #$78 ; bank $12 to $78
|
|
|
|
mvp $123456, $789ABC ; bank $12 to $78
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>6502X mode<label id="6502X-mode"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
6502X mode is an extension to the normal 6502 mode. In this mode, several
|
|
|
|
mnemonics for illegal instructions of the NMOS 6502 CPUs are accepted. Since
|
|
|
|
these instructions are illegal, there are no official mnemonics for them. The
|
2014-04-14 09:54:13 +00:00
|
|
|
unofficial ones are taken from <url
|
|
|
|
url="http://www.oxyron.de/html/opcodes02.html">. Please note that only the
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
ones marked as "stable" are supported. The following table uses information
|
|
|
|
from the mentioned web page, for more information, see there.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<itemize>
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>ALR: A:=(A and #{imm})/2;</tt>
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>ANC: A:=A and #{imm};</tt> Generates opcode $0B.
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>ARR: A:=(A and #{imm})/2;</tt>
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>AXS: X:=A and X-#{imm};</tt>
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>DCP: {adr}:={adr}-1; A-{adr};</tt>
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>ISC: {adr}:={adr}+1; A:=A-{adr};</tt>
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>LAS: A,X,S:={adr} and S;</tt>
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>LAX: A,X:={adr};</tt>
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>RLA: {adr}:={adr}rol; A:=A and {adr};</tt>
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>RRA: {adr}:={adr}ror; A:=A adc {adr};</tt>
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>SAX: {adr}:=A and X;</tt>
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>SLO: {adr}:={adr}*2; A:=A or {adr};</tt>
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>SRE: {adr}:={adr}/2; A:=A xor {adr};</tt>
|
|
|
|
</itemize>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2016-08-29 08:45:18 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1>4510 mode<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The 4510 is a microcontroller that is the core of the Commodore C65 aka C64DX.
|
2016-08-29 21:29:31 +00:00
|
|
|
It contains among other functions a slightly modified 65CE02/4502 CPU, to allow
|
2016-08-29 08:45:18 +00:00
|
|
|
address mapping for 20 bits of address space (1 megabyte addressable area).
|
2016-08-29 21:29:31 +00:00
|
|
|
As compared to the description of the CPU in the
|
|
|
|
<url url="http://www.zimmers.net/anonftp/pub/cbm/c65/c65manualupdated.txt.gz"
|
|
|
|
name="C65 System Specification">
|
|
|
|
<url url="https://raw.githubusercontent.com/MEGA65/c65-specifications/master/c65manualupdated.txt"
|
|
|
|
name="(updated version)"> uses these changes:
|
2016-08-29 08:45:18 +00:00
|
|
|
<itemize>
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>LDA (d,SP),Y</tt> may also be written as <tt>LDA (d,S),Y</tt>
|
|
|
|
(matching the 65816 notataion).
|
|
|
|
<item>All branch instruction allow now 16 bit offsets. To use a 16 bit
|
|
|
|
branch you have to prefix these with an "L" (e.g. "<tt>LBNE</tt>" instead of
|
2016-08-30 20:58:40 +00:00
|
|
|
"<tt>BNE</tt>"). This might change at a later implementation of the assembler.
|
2016-08-29 08:45:18 +00:00
|
|
|
</itemize>
|
|
|
|
For more information about the Commodore C65/C64DX and the 4510 CPU, see
|
2016-08-29 21:29:31 +00:00
|
|
|
<url url="http://www.zimmers.net/anonftp/pub/cbm/c65/"> and
|
|
|
|
<url url="https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Commodore_65" name="Wikipedia">.
|
2016-08-29 08:45:18 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>sweet16 mode<label id="sweet16-mode"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
SWEET 16 is an interpreter for a pseudo 16 bit CPU written by Steve Wozniak
|
|
|
|
for the Apple ][ machines. It is available in the Apple ][ ROM. ca65 can
|
|
|
|
generate code for this pseudo CPU when switched into sweet16 mode. The
|
|
|
|
following is special in sweet16 mode:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<itemize>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<item>The '@' character denotes indirect addressing and is no longer available
|
|
|
|
for cheap local labels. If you need cheap local labels, you will have to
|
|
|
|
switch to another lead character using the <tt/<ref id=".LOCALCHAR"
|
|
|
|
name=".LOCALCHAR">/ command.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<item>Registers are specified using <tt/R0/ .. <tt/R15/. In sweet16 mode,
|
|
|
|
these identifiers are reserved words.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</itemize>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please note that the assembler does neither supply the interpreter needed for
|
|
|
|
SWEET 16 code, nor the zero page locations needed for the SWEET 16 registers,
|
|
|
|
nor does it call the interpreter. All this must be done by your program. Apple
|
|
|
|
][ programmers do probably know how to use sweet16 mode.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For more information about SWEET 16, see
|
2014-04-14 09:54:13 +00:00
|
|
|
<url url="http://www.6502.org/source/interpreters/sweet16.htm">.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Number format<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For literal values, the assembler accepts the widely used number formats: A
|
|
|
|
preceding '$' or a trailing 'h' denotes a hex value, a preceding '%'
|
|
|
|
denotes a binary value, and a bare number is interpreted as a decimal. There
|
|
|
|
are currently no octal values and no floats.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Conditional assembly<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please note that when using the conditional directives (<tt/.IF/ and friends),
|
|
|
|
the input must consist of valid assembler tokens, even in <tt/.IF/ branches
|
|
|
|
that are not assembled. The reason for this behaviour is that the assembler
|
|
|
|
must still be able to detect the ending tokens (like <tt/.ENDIF/), so
|
|
|
|
conversion of the input stream into tokens still takes place. As a consequence
|
|
|
|
conditional assembly directives may <bf/not/ be used to prevent normal text
|
|
|
|
(used as a comment or similar) from being assembled. <p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect>Expressions<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Expression evaluation<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
All expressions are evaluated with (at least) 32 bit precision. An
|
|
|
|
expression may contain constant values and any combination of internal and
|
|
|
|
external symbols. Expressions that cannot be evaluated at assembly time
|
|
|
|
are stored inside the object file for evaluation by the linker.
|
|
|
|
Expressions referencing imported symbols must always be evaluated by the
|
|
|
|
linker.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Size of an expression result<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sometimes, the assembler must know about the size of the value that is the
|
|
|
|
result of an expression. This is usually the case, if a decision has to be
|
|
|
|
made, to generate a zero page or an absolute memory references. In this
|
|
|
|
case, the assembler has to make some assumptions about the result of an
|
|
|
|
expression:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<itemize>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
<item> If the result of an expression is constant, the actual value is
|
|
|
|
checked to see if it's a byte sized expression or not.
|
|
|
|
<item> If the expression is explicitly casted to a byte sized expression by
|
|
|
|
one of the '>', '<' or '^' operators, it is a byte expression.
|
|
|
|
<item> If this is not the case, and the expression contains a symbol,
|
|
|
|
explicitly declared as zero page symbol (by one of the .importzp or
|
|
|
|
.exportzp instructions), then the whole expression is assumed to be
|
|
|
|
byte sized.
|
|
|
|
<item> If the expression contains symbols that are not defined, and these
|
|
|
|
symbols are local symbols, the enclosing scopes are searched for a
|
|
|
|
symbol with the same name. If one exists and this symbol is defined,
|
|
|
|
its attributes are used to determine the result size.
|
|
|
|
<item> In all other cases the expression is assumed to be word sized.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</itemize>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: If the assembler is not able to evaluate the expression at assembly
|
|
|
|
time, the linker will evaluate it and check for range errors as soon as
|
|
|
|
the result is known.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Boolean expressions<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In the context of a boolean expression, any non zero value is evaluated as
|
|
|
|
true, any other value to false. The result of a boolean expression is 1 if
|
|
|
|
it's true, and zero if it's false. There are boolean operators with extreme
|
|
|
|
low precedence with version 2.x (where x > 0). The <tt/.AND/ and <tt/.OR/
|
|
|
|
operators are shortcut operators. That is, if the result of the expression is
|
|
|
|
already known, after evaluating the left hand side, the right hand side is
|
|
|
|
not evaluated.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Constant expressions<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sometimes an expression must evaluate to a constant without looking at any
|
|
|
|
further input. One such example is the <tt/<ref id=".IF" name=".IF">/ command
|
|
|
|
that decides if parts of the code are assembled or not. An expression used in
|
|
|
|
the <tt/.IF/ command cannot reference a symbol defined later, because the
|
|
|
|
decision about the <tt/.IF/ must be made at the point when it is read. If the
|
|
|
|
expression used in such a context contains only constant numerical values,
|
|
|
|
there is no problem. When unresolvable symbols are involved it may get harder
|
|
|
|
for the assembler to determine if the expression is actually constant, and it
|
|
|
|
is even possible to create expressions that aren't recognized as constant.
|
|
|
|
Simplifying the expressions will often help.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In cases where the result of the expression is not needed immediately, the
|
|
|
|
assembler will delay evaluation until all input is read, at which point all
|
|
|
|
symbols are known. So using arbitrary complex constant expressions is no
|
|
|
|
problem in most cases.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Available operators<label id="operators"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<table>
|
|
|
|
<tabular ca="clc">
|
|
|
|
<bf/Operator/| <bf/Description/| <bf/Precedence/@<hline>
|
|
|
|
| Built-in string functions| 0@
|
2020-07-16 15:56:58 +00:00
|
|
|
~|~|~@
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
| Built-in pseudo-variables| 1@
|
|
|
|
| Built-in pseudo-functions| 1@
|
|
|
|
+| Unary positive| 1@
|
|
|
|
-| Unary negative| 1@
|
|
|
|
˜<newline>
|
|
|
|
.BITNOT| Unary bitwise not| 1@
|
|
|
|
<<newline>
|
|
|
|
.LOBYTE| Unary low-byte operator| 1@
|
|
|
|
><newline>
|
|
|
|
.HIBYTE| Unary high-byte operator| 1@
|
|
|
|
^<newline>
|
|
|
|
.BANKBYTE| Unary bank-byte operator| 1@
|
2020-07-16 15:56:58 +00:00
|
|
|
~|~|~@
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
*| Multiplication| 2@
|
|
|
|
/| Division| 2@
|
|
|
|
.MOD| Modulo operator| 2@
|
|
|
|
&<newline>
|
|
|
|
.BITAND| Bitwise and| 2@
|
|
|
|
^<newline>
|
|
|
|
.BITXOR| Binary bitwise xor| 2@
|
|
|
|
<<<newline>
|
|
|
|
.SHL| Shift-left operator| 2@
|
|
|
|
>><newline>
|
|
|
|
.SHR| Shift-right operator| 2@
|
2020-07-16 15:56:58 +00:00
|
|
|
~|~|~@
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
+| Binary addition| 3@
|
|
|
|
-| Binary subtraction| 3@
|
|
|
|
|<newline>
|
|
|
|
.BITOR| Bitwise or| 3@
|
2020-07-16 15:56:58 +00:00
|
|
|
~|~|~@
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
= | Compare operator (equal)| 4@
|
|
|
|
<>| Compare operator (not equal)| 4@
|
|
|
|
<| Compare operator (less)| 4@
|
|
|
|
>| Compare operator (greater)| 4@
|
|
|
|
<=| Compare operator (less or equal)| 4@
|
|
|
|
>=| Compare operator (greater or equal)| 4@
|
2020-07-16 15:56:58 +00:00
|
|
|
~|~|~@
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
&&<newline>
|
|
|
|
.AND| Boolean and| 5@
|
|
|
|
.XOR| Boolean xor| 5@
|
2020-07-16 15:56:58 +00:00
|
|
|
~|~|~@
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
||<newline>
|
|
|
|
.OR| Boolean or| 6@
|
2020-07-16 15:56:58 +00:00
|
|
|
~|~|~@
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
!<newline>
|
2020-07-16 15:56:58 +00:00
|
|
|
.NOT| Boolean not| 7
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</tabular>
|
|
|
|
<caption>Available operators, sorted by precedence
|
|
|
|
</table>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To force a specific order of evaluation, parentheses may be used, as usual.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect>Symbols and labels<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A symbol or label is an identifier that starts with a letter and is followed
|
|
|
|
by letters and digits. Depending on some features enabled (see
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id="at_in_identifiers" name="at_in_identifiers"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id="dollar_in_identifiers" name="dollar_in_identifiers"></tt> and
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id="leading_dot_in_identifiers" name="leading_dot_in_identifiers"></tt>)
|
|
|
|
other characters may be present. Use of identifiers consisting of a single
|
|
|
|
character will not work in all cases, because some of these identifiers are
|
|
|
|
reserved keywords (for example "A" is not a valid identifier for a label,
|
|
|
|
because it is the keyword for the accumulator).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The assembler allows you to use symbols instead of naked values to make
|
|
|
|
the source more readable. There are a lot of different ways to define and
|
|
|
|
use symbols and labels, giving a lot of flexibility.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Numeric constants<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Numeric constants are defined using the equal sign or the label assignment
|
|
|
|
operator. After doing
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
two = 2
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
may use the symbol "two" in every place where a number is expected, and it is
|
|
|
|
evaluated to the value 2 in this context. The label assignment operator is
|
|
|
|
almost identical, but causes the symbol to be marked as a label, so it may be
|
|
|
|
handled differently in a debugger:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
io := $d000
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The right side can of course be an expression:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
four = two * two
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<label id="variables">
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Numeric variables<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Within macros and other control structures (<tt><ref id=".REPEAT"
|
|
|
|
name=".REPEAT"></tt>, ...) it is sometimes useful to have some sort of
|
|
|
|
variable. This can be achieved by the <tt>.SET</tt> operator. It creates a
|
|
|
|
symbol that may get assigned a different value later:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
four .set 4
|
|
|
|
lda #four ; Loads 4 into A
|
|
|
|
four .set 3
|
|
|
|
lda #four ; Loads 3 into A
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Since the value of the symbol can change later, it must be possible to
|
|
|
|
evaluate it when used (no delayed evaluation as with normal symbols). So the
|
|
|
|
expression used as the value must be constant.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Following is an example for a macro that generates a different label each time
|
|
|
|
it is used. It uses the <tt><ref id=".SPRINTF" name=".SPRINTF"></tt> function
|
|
|
|
and a numeric variable named <tt>lcount</tt>.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.lcount .set 0 ; Initialize the counter
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.macro genlab
|
|
|
|
.ident (.sprintf ("L%04X", lcount)):
|
|
|
|
lcount .set lcount + 1
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Standard labels<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A label is defined by writing the name of the label at the start of the line
|
|
|
|
(before any instruction mnemonic, macro or pseudo directive), followed by a
|
|
|
|
colon. This will declare a symbol with the given name and the value of the
|
|
|
|
current program counter.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Local labels and symbols<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Using the <tt><ref id=".PROC" name=".PROC"></tt> directive, it is possible to
|
|
|
|
create regions of code where the names of labels and symbols are local to this
|
|
|
|
region. They are not known outside of this region and cannot be accessed from
|
|
|
|
there. Such regions may be nested like PROCEDUREs in Pascal.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See the description of the <tt><ref id=".PROC" name=".PROC"></tt>
|
|
|
|
directive for more information.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Cheap local labels<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cheap local labels are defined like standard labels, but the name of the
|
|
|
|
label must begin with a special symbol (usually '@', but this can be
|
|
|
|
changed by the <tt><ref id=".LOCALCHAR" name=".LOCALCHAR"></tt>
|
|
|
|
directive).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cheap local labels are visible only between two non cheap labels. As soon as a
|
|
|
|
standard symbol is encountered (this may also be a local symbol if inside a
|
|
|
|
region defined with the <tt><ref id=".PROC" name=".PROC"></tt> directive), the
|
|
|
|
cheap local symbol goes out of scope.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may use cheap local labels as an easy way to reuse common label
|
|
|
|
names like "Loop". Here is an example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
Clear: lda #$00 ; Global label
|
|
|
|
ldy #$20
|
|
|
|
@Loop: sta Mem,y ; Local label
|
|
|
|
dey
|
|
|
|
bne @Loop ; Ok
|
|
|
|
rts
|
|
|
|
Sub: ... ; New global label
|
|
|
|
bne @Loop ; ERROR: Unknown identifier!
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
2023-09-23 16:59:28 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1>Unnamed labels<p>
|
|
|
|
|
2023-09-23 16:59:28 +00:00
|
|
|
If you really want to write messy code, there are also unnamed labels. To define
|
|
|
|
an unnamed label, use either <tt>@:</tt> (<tt>.LOCALCHAR</tt> is respected if it
|
|
|
|
is set) or sole <tt>:</tt>.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2023-09-23 16:59:28 +00:00
|
|
|
To reference an unnamed label, use <tt>@</tt> (<tt>.LOCALCHAR</tt> is respected
|
|
|
|
if it is set) or <tt>:</tt> with several <tt>-</tt> or <tt>+</tt> characters.
|
|
|
|
The <tt>-</tt> characters will create a back reference (n'th label backwards),
|
|
|
|
the <tt>+</tt> will create a forward reference (n'th label in forward direction).
|
|
|
|
As an alternative, angle brackets <tt><</tt> and <tt>></tt> may be used
|
|
|
|
instead of <tt>-</tt> and <tt>+</tt> with the same meaning.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2023-09-23 16:59:28 +00:00
|
|
|
Example:
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2023-09-23 16:59:28 +00:00
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
cpy #0
|
|
|
|
beq @++
|
|
|
|
@:
|
|
|
|
sta $2007
|
|
|
|
dey
|
|
|
|
bne @-
|
|
|
|
@:
|
|
|
|
rts
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
2023-09-23 16:59:28 +00:00
|
|
|
Unnamed labels may make even short sections of code hard to understand, because
|
|
|
|
you have to count labels to find branch targets. It's better to prefer the
|
|
|
|
"cheap" local labels. Nevertheless, unnamed labels are convenient in some
|
|
|
|
situations, so it's up to your discretion.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-04-24 17:03:52 +00:00
|
|
|
<em/Note:/ <ref id="scopes" name="Scopes"> organize named symbols, not
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
unnamed ones, so scopes don't have an effect on unnamed labels.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Using macros to define labels and constants<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
While there are drawbacks with this approach, it may be handy in a few rare
|
|
|
|
situations. Using <tt><ref id=".DEFINE" name=".DEFINE"></tt>, it is possible
|
|
|
|
to define symbols or constants that may be used elsewhere. One of the
|
|
|
|
advantages is that you can use it to define string constants (this is not
|
|
|
|
possible with the other symbol types).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please note: <tt/.DEFINE/ style macros do token replacements on a low level,
|
|
|
|
so the names do not adhere to scoping, diagnostics may be misleading, there
|
|
|
|
are no symbols to look up in the map file, and there is no debug info.
|
|
|
|
Especially the first problem in the list can lead to very nasty programming
|
|
|
|
errors. Because of these problems, the general advice is, <bf/NOT/ do use
|
|
|
|
<tt/.DEFINE/ if you don't have to.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.DEFINE two 2
|
|
|
|
.DEFINE version "SOS V2.3"
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
four = two * two ; Ok
|
|
|
|
.byte version ; Ok
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.PROC ; Start local scope
|
|
|
|
two = 3 ; Will give "2 = 3" - invalid!
|
|
|
|
.ENDPROC
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Symbols and <tt>.DEBUGINFO</tt><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If <tt><ref id=".DEBUGINFO" name=".DEBUGINFO"></tt> is enabled (or <ref
|
|
|
|
id="option-g" name="-g"> is given on the command line), global, local and
|
|
|
|
cheap local labels are written to the object file and will be available in the
|
|
|
|
symbol file via the linker. Unnamed labels are not written to the object file,
|
|
|
|
because they don't have a name which would allow to access them.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect>Scopes<label id="scopes"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
ca65 implements several sorts of scopes for symbols.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Global scope<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
All (non cheap local) symbols that are declared outside of any nested scopes
|
|
|
|
are in global scope.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Cheap locals<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A special scope is the scope for cheap local symbols. It lasts from one non
|
|
|
|
local symbol to the next one, without any provisions made by the programmer.
|
|
|
|
All other scopes differ in usage but use the same concept internally.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Generic nested scopes<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A nested scoped for generic use is started with <tt/<ref id=".SCOPE"
|
|
|
|
name=".SCOPE">/ and closed with <tt/<ref id=".ENDSCOPE" name=".ENDSCOPE">/.
|
|
|
|
The scope can have a name, in which case it is accessible from the outside by
|
|
|
|
using <ref id="scopesyntax" name="explicit scopes">. If the scope does not
|
|
|
|
have a name, all symbols created within the scope are local to the scope, and
|
|
|
|
aren't accessible from the outside.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A nested scope can access symbols from the local or from enclosing scopes by
|
|
|
|
name without using explicit scope names. In some cases there may be
|
|
|
|
ambiguities, for example if there is a reference to a local symbol that is not
|
|
|
|
yet defined, but a symbol with the same name exists in outer scopes:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.scope outer
|
|
|
|
foo = 2
|
|
|
|
.scope inner
|
|
|
|
lda #foo
|
|
|
|
foo = 3
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In the example above, the <tt/lda/ instruction will load the value 3 into the
|
|
|
|
accumulator, because <tt/foo/ is redefined in the scope. However:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.scope outer
|
|
|
|
foo = $1234
|
|
|
|
.scope inner
|
|
|
|
lda foo,x
|
|
|
|
foo = $12
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here, <tt/lda/ will still load from <tt/$12,x/, but since it is unknown to the
|
|
|
|
assembler that <tt/foo/ is a zeropage symbol when translating the instruction,
|
|
|
|
absolute mode is used instead. In fact, the assembler will not use absolute
|
|
|
|
mode by default, but it will search through the enclosing scopes for a symbol
|
|
|
|
with the given name. If one is found, the address size of this symbol is used.
|
|
|
|
This may lead to errors:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.scope outer
|
|
|
|
foo = $12
|
|
|
|
.scope inner
|
|
|
|
lda foo,x
|
|
|
|
foo = $1234
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In this case, when the assembler sees the symbol <tt/foo/ in the <tt/lda/
|
|
|
|
instruction, it will search for an already defined symbol <tt/foo/. It will
|
|
|
|
find <tt/foo/ in scope <tt/outer/, and a close look reveals that it is a
|
|
|
|
zeropage symbol. So the assembler will use zeropage addressing mode. If
|
|
|
|
<tt/foo/ is redefined later in scope <tt/inner/, the assembler tries to change
|
|
|
|
the address in the <tt/lda/ instruction already translated, but since the new
|
|
|
|
value needs absolute addressing mode, this fails, and an error message "Range
|
|
|
|
error" is output.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of course the most simple solution for the problem is to move the definition
|
|
|
|
of <tt/foo/ in scope <tt/inner/ upwards, so it precedes its use. There may be
|
|
|
|
rare cases when this cannot be done. In these cases, you can use one of the
|
|
|
|
address size override operators:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.scope outer
|
|
|
|
foo = $12
|
|
|
|
.scope inner
|
|
|
|
lda a:foo,x
|
|
|
|
foo = $1234
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This will cause the <tt/lda/ instruction to be translated using absolute
|
|
|
|
addressing mode, which means changing the symbol reference later does not
|
|
|
|
cause any errors.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Nested procedures<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A nested procedure is created by use of <tt/<ref id=".PROC" name=".PROC">/. It
|
|
|
|
differs from a <tt/<ref id=".SCOPE" name=".SCOPE">/ in that it must have a
|
|
|
|
name, and a it will introduce a symbol with this name in the enclosing scope.
|
|
|
|
So
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.proc foo
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
.endproc
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
is actually the same as
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
foo:
|
|
|
|
.scope foo
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This is the reason why a procedure must have a name. If you want a scope
|
|
|
|
without a name, use <tt/<ref id=".SCOPE" name=".SCOPE">/.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-04-24 17:03:52 +00:00
|
|
|
<em/Note:/ As you can see from the example above, scopes and symbols live in
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
different namespaces. There can be a symbol named <tt/foo/ and a scope named
|
|
|
|
<tt/foo/ without any conflicts (but see the section titled <ref
|
|
|
|
id="scopesearch" name=""Scope search order"">).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Structs, unions and enums<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Structs, unions and enums are explained in a <ref id="structs" name="separate
|
|
|
|
section">, I do only cover them here, because if they are declared with a
|
|
|
|
name, they open a nested scope, similar to <tt/<ref id=".SCOPE"
|
|
|
|
name=".SCOPE">/. However, when no name is specified, the behaviour is
|
|
|
|
different: In this case, no new scope will be opened, symbols declared within
|
|
|
|
a struct, union, or enum declaration will then be added to the enclosing scope
|
|
|
|
instead.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Explicit scope specification<label id="scopesyntax"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accessing symbols from other scopes is possible by using an explicit scope
|
|
|
|
specification, provided that the scope where the symbol lives in has a name.
|
|
|
|
The namespace token (<tt/::/) is used to access other scopes:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.scope foo
|
|
|
|
bar: .word 0
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
...
|
2024-12-15 13:50:45 +00:00
|
|
|
lda #foo::bar ; Access bar in scope foo
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The only way to deny access to a scope from the outside is to declare a scope
|
|
|
|
without a name (using the <tt/<ref id=".SCOPE" name=".SCOPE">/ command).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A special syntax is used to specify the global scope: If a symbol or scope is
|
|
|
|
preceded by the namespace token, the global scope is searched:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
bar = 3
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.scope foo
|
|
|
|
bar = 2
|
|
|
|
lda #::bar ; Access the global bar (which is 3)
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Scope search order<label id="scopesearch"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The assembler searches for a scope in a similar way as for a symbol. First, it
|
|
|
|
looks in the current scope, and then it walks up the enclosing scopes until
|
|
|
|
the scope is found.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
However, one important thing to note when using explicit scope syntax is, that
|
|
|
|
a symbol may be accessed before it is defined, but a scope may <bf/not/ be
|
|
|
|
used without a preceding definition. This means that in the following
|
|
|
|
example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.scope foo
|
|
|
|
bar = 3
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.scope outer
|
|
|
|
lda #foo::bar ; Will load 3, not 2!
|
|
|
|
.scope foo
|
|
|
|
bar = 2
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
the reference to the scope <tt/foo/ will use the global scope, and not the
|
|
|
|
local one, because the local one is not visible at the point where it is
|
|
|
|
referenced.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Things get more complex if a complete chain of scopes is specified:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.scope foo
|
|
|
|
.scope outer
|
|
|
|
.scope inner
|
|
|
|
bar = 1
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
.scope another
|
|
|
|
.scope nested
|
|
|
|
lda #outer::inner::bar ; 1
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.scope outer
|
|
|
|
.scope inner
|
|
|
|
bar = 2
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When <tt/outer::inner::bar/ is referenced in the <tt/lda/ instruction, the
|
|
|
|
assembler will first search in the local scope for a scope named <tt/outer/.
|
|
|
|
Since none is found, the enclosing scope (<tt/another/) is checked. There is
|
|
|
|
still no scope named <tt/outer/, so scope <tt/foo/ is checked, and finally
|
|
|
|
scope <tt/outer/ is found. Within this scope, <tt/inner/ is searched, and in
|
|
|
|
this scope, the assembler looks for a symbol named <tt/bar/.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please note that once the anchor scope is found, all following scopes
|
|
|
|
(<tt/inner/ in this case) are expected to be found exactly in this scope. The
|
|
|
|
assembler will search the scope tree only for the first scope (if it is not
|
|
|
|
anchored in the root scope). Starting from there on, there is no flexibility,
|
|
|
|
so if the scope named <tt/outer/ found by the assembler does not contain a
|
|
|
|
scope named <tt/inner/, this would be an error, even if such a pair does exist
|
|
|
|
(one level up in global scope).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Ambiguities that may be introduced by this search algorithm may be removed by
|
|
|
|
anchoring the scope specification in the global scope. In the example above,
|
|
|
|
if you want to access the "other" symbol <tt/bar/, you would have to write:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.scope foo
|
|
|
|
.scope outer
|
|
|
|
.scope inner
|
|
|
|
bar = 1
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
.scope another
|
|
|
|
.scope nested
|
|
|
|
lda #::outer::inner::bar ; 2
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.scope outer
|
|
|
|
.scope inner
|
|
|
|
bar = 2
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect>Address sizes and memory models<label id="address-sizes"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Address sizes<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
ca65 assigns each segment and each symbol an address size. This is true, even
|
|
|
|
if the symbol is not used as an address. You may also think of a value range
|
|
|
|
of the symbol instead of an address size.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Possible address sizes are:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<itemize>
|
|
|
|
<item>Zeropage or direct (8 bits)
|
|
|
|
<item>Absolute (16 bits)
|
|
|
|
<item>Far (24 bits)
|
|
|
|
<item>Long (32 bits)
|
|
|
|
</itemize>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Since the assembler uses default address sizes for the segments and symbols,
|
|
|
|
it is usually not necessary to override the default behaviour. In cases, where
|
|
|
|
it is necessary, the following keywords may be used to specify address sizes:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<itemize>
|
|
|
|
<item>DIRECT, ZEROPAGE or ZP for zeropage addressing (8 bits).
|
|
|
|
<item>ABSOLUTE, ABS or NEAR for absolute addressing (16 bits).
|
|
|
|
<item>FAR for far addressing (24 bits).
|
|
|
|
<item>LONG or DWORD for long addressing (32 bits).
|
|
|
|
</itemize>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Address sizes of segments<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The assembler assigns an address size to each segment. Since the
|
|
|
|
representation of a label within this segment is "segment start + offset",
|
|
|
|
labels will inherit the address size of the segment they are declared in.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The address size of a segment may be changed, by using an optional address
|
|
|
|
size modifier. See the <tt/<ref id=".SEGMENT" name="segment directive">/ for
|
|
|
|
an explanation on how this is done.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Address sizes of symbols<p>
|
|
|
|
|
2018-10-18 01:27:21 +00:00
|
|
|
The address size of a symbol can be specified with a prefix:
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2018-10-18 01:27:21 +00:00
|
|
|
<itemize>
|
|
|
|
<item>z: zeropage addressing (8 bits).
|
|
|
|
<item>a: absolute addressing (16 bits).
|
|
|
|
<item>f: far addressing (24 bits).
|
|
|
|
</itemize>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The zeropage addressing override can be used to ensure the use of optimal
|
|
|
|
zeropage instructions, or correct cases where the size isn't yet known
|
|
|
|
due to the single-pass assembly model.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The larger addressing overrides can be used to promote a smaller address
|
|
|
|
to absolute or far addressing, instead of being automatically fit into
|
|
|
|
a smaller addressing type.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Memory models<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The default address size of a segment depends on the memory model used. Since
|
|
|
|
labels inherit the address size from the segment they are declared in,
|
|
|
|
changing the memory model is an easy way to change the address size of many
|
|
|
|
symbols at once.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect>Pseudo variables<label id="pseudo-variables"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Pseudo variables are readable in all cases, and in some special cases also
|
|
|
|
writable.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>*</tt><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Reading this pseudo variable will return the program counter at the start
|
|
|
|
of the current input line.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Assignment to this variable is possible when <tt/<ref id=".FEATURE"
|
|
|
|
name=".FEATURE pc_assignment">/ is used. Note: You should not use
|
|
|
|
assignments to <tt/*/, use <tt/<ref id=".ORG" name=".ORG">/ instead.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2015-10-19 23:30:25 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.ASIZE</tt><label id=".ASIZE"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Reading this pseudo variable will return the current size of the
|
|
|
|
Accumulator in bits.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For the 65816 instruction set .ASIZE will return either 8 or 16, depending
|
|
|
|
on the current size of the operand in immediate accu addressing mode.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For all other CPU instruction sets, .ASIZE will always return 8.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
; Reverse Subtract with Accumulator
|
|
|
|
; A = memory - A
|
|
|
|
.macro rsb param
|
|
|
|
.if .asize = 8
|
|
|
|
eor #$ff
|
|
|
|
.else
|
|
|
|
eor #$ffff
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
sec
|
|
|
|
adc param
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2015-10-19 23:30:25 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also: <tt><ref id=".ISIZE" name=".ISIZE"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.CPU</tt><label id=".CPU"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Reading this pseudo variable will give a constant integer value that
|
|
|
|
tells which CPU is currently enabled. It can also tell which instruction
|
|
|
|
set the CPU is able to translate. The value read from the pseudo variable
|
|
|
|
should be further examined by using one of the constants defined by the
|
|
|
|
"cpu" macro package (see <tt/<ref id=".MACPACK" name=".MACPACK">/).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
It may be used to replace the .IFPxx pseudo instructions or to construct
|
|
|
|
even more complex expressions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.macpack cpu
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.if (.cpu .bitand CPU_ISET_65816)
|
|
|
|
phx
|
|
|
|
phy
|
|
|
|
.else
|
|
|
|
txa
|
|
|
|
pha
|
|
|
|
tya
|
|
|
|
pha
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2015-10-19 23:30:25 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.ISIZE</tt><label id=".ISIZE"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Reading this pseudo variable will return the current size of the Index
|
|
|
|
register in bits.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For the 65816 instruction set .ISIZE will return either 8 or 16, depending
|
|
|
|
on the current size of the operand in immediate index addressing mode.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For all other CPU instruction sets, .ISIZE will always return 8.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also: <tt><ref id=".ASIZE" name=".ASIZE"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.PARAMCOUNT</tt><label id=".PARAMCOUNT"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This builtin pseudo variable is only available in macros. It is replaced by
|
|
|
|
the actual number of parameters that were given in the macro invocation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro foo arg1, arg2, arg3
|
|
|
|
.if .paramcount <> 3
|
|
|
|
.error "Too few parameters for macro foo"
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See section <ref id="macros" name="Macros">.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.TIME</tt><label id=".TIME"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Reading this pseudo variable will give a constant integer value that
|
|
|
|
represents the current time in POSIX standard (as seconds since the
|
|
|
|
Epoch).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
It may be used to encode the time of translation somewhere in the created
|
|
|
|
code.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.dword .time ; Place time here
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.VERSION</tt><label id=".VERSION"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Reading this pseudo variable will give the assembler version according to
|
|
|
|
the following formula:
|
|
|
|
|
2023-08-19 13:39:16 +00:00
|
|
|
<tt>(VER_MAJOR * 0x100) + VER_MINOR</tt>
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2023-08-19 13:39:16 +00:00
|
|
|
The upper 8 bits are the major-, the lower 8 bits are the minor version.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
2023-08-19 13:39:16 +00:00
|
|
|
For example, version 47.11 of the assembler would have this macro defined as
|
|
|
|
<tt/0x2f0b/.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2023-08-19 13:39:16 +00:00
|
|
|
Note: until 2.19 this pseudo variable was defined as <tt>(VER_MAJOR * 0x100) + VER_MINOR * 0x10</tt> -
|
|
|
|
which resulted in broken values starting at version 2.16 of the assembler. For
|
|
|
|
this reason the value of this pseudo variable is considered purely informal - you should
|
|
|
|
not use it to check for a specific assembler version and use different code
|
|
|
|
according to the detected version - please update your code to work with the
|
|
|
|
recent version of the assembler instead (There is very little reason to not use
|
|
|
|
the most recent version - and even less to support older versions in your code).
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect>Pseudo functions<label id="pseudo-functions"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2021-04-24 17:20:10 +00:00
|
|
|
Pseudo functions expect their arguments in parentheses, and they have a result,
|
|
|
|
either a string or an expression value.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2015-04-21 20:09:01 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2015-04-20 22:56:34 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.ADDRSIZE</tt><label id=".ADDRSIZE"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2021-04-24 17:20:10 +00:00
|
|
|
The <tt/.ADDRSIZE/ function is used to return the internal address size
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
associated with a symbol. This can be helpful in macros when knowing the address
|
2021-04-24 17:20:10 +00:00
|
|
|
size of a symbol can help with custom instructions.
|
2015-04-20 22:56:34 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.macro myLDA foo
|
2015-04-21 20:09:01 +00:00
|
|
|
.if .ADDRSIZE(foo) = 1
|
|
|
|
;do custom command based on zeropage addressing:
|
|
|
|
.byte 0A5h, foo
|
|
|
|
.elseif .ADDRSIZE(foo) = 2
|
|
|
|
;do custom command based on absolute addressing:
|
|
|
|
.byte 0ADh
|
|
|
|
.word foo
|
|
|
|
.elseif .ADDRSIZE(foo) = 0
|
2015-04-21 20:21:27 +00:00
|
|
|
; no address size defined for this symbol:
|
2015-04-21 20:09:01 +00:00
|
|
|
.out .sprintf("Error, address size unknown for symbol %s", .string(foo))
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
2015-04-20 22:56:34 +00:00
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.BANK</tt><label id=".BANK"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The <tt/.BANK/ function is used to support systems with banked memory. The
|
2021-04-24 17:20:10 +00:00
|
|
|
argument is an expression with exactly one segment reference -- usually a
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
label. The function result is the value of the <tt/bank/ attribute assigned
|
|
|
|
to the run memory area of the segment. Please see the linker documentation
|
|
|
|
for more information about memory areas and their attributes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The value of <tt/.BANK/ can be used to switch memory so that a memory bank
|
|
|
|
containing specific data is available.
|
|
|
|
|
2021-04-24 17:20:10 +00:00
|
|
|
The <tt/bank/ attribute is a 32-bit integer, and so is the result of the
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<tt/.BANK/ function. You will have to use <tt><ref id=".LOBYTE"
|
|
|
|
name=".LOBYTE"></tt> or similar functions to address just part of it.
|
|
|
|
|
2021-04-24 17:20:10 +00:00
|
|
|
Please note that <tt/.BANK/ always will get evaluated in the link stage, so
|
|
|
|
an expression containing <tt/.BANK/ never can be used where a constant, known
|
|
|
|
result is expected (for example, with <tt/.RES/).
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.segment "BANK1"
|
|
|
|
.proc banked_func_1
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
.endproc
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.segment "BANK2"
|
|
|
|
.proc banked_func_2
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
.endproc
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.proc bank_table
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.addr banked_func_1
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
.byte <.BANK (banked_func_1)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.addr banked_func_2
|
|
|
|
.byte <.BANK (banked_func_2)
|
|
|
|
.endproc
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.BANKBYTE</tt><label id=".BANKBYTE"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The function returns the bank byte (that is, bits 16-23) of its argument.
|
|
|
|
It works identical to the '^' operator.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".HIBYTE" name=".HIBYTE"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".LOBYTE" name=".LOBYTE"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.BLANK</tt><label id=".BLANK"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2021-04-24 17:20:10 +00:00
|
|
|
Builtin function. The function evaluates its argument in parentheses and yields
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
"false" if the argument is non blank (there is an argument), and "true" if
|
|
|
|
there is no argument. The token list that makes up the function argument
|
|
|
|
may optionally be enclosed in curly braces. This allows the inclusion of
|
|
|
|
tokens that would otherwise terminate the list (the closing right
|
|
|
|
parenthesis). The curly braces are not considered part of the list, a list
|
|
|
|
just consisting of curly braces is considered to be empty.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
As an example, the <tt/.IFBLANK/ statement may be replaced by
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.if .blank({arg})
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.CONCAT</tt><label id=".CONCAT"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Builtin string function. The function allows to concatenate a list of string
|
|
|
|
constants separated by commas. The result is a string constant that is the
|
|
|
|
concatenation of all arguments. This function is most useful in macros and
|
|
|
|
when used together with the <tt/.STRING/ builtin function. The function may
|
|
|
|
be used in any case where a string constant is expected.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.include .concat ("myheader", ".", "inc")
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This is the same as the command
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.include "myheader.inc"
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.CONST</tt><label id=".CONST"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2021-04-24 17:20:10 +00:00
|
|
|
Builtin function. The function evaluates its argument in parentheses and
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
yields "true" if the argument is a constant expression (that is, an
|
|
|
|
expression that yields a constant value at assembly time) and "false"
|
|
|
|
otherwise. As an example, the .IFCONST statement may be replaced by
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.if .const(a + 3)
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2021-04-24 17:20:10 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.DEF, .DEFINED</tt><label id=".DEFINED"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Builtin function. The function expects an identifier as argument in parentheses.
|
|
|
|
The argument is evaluated, and the function yields "true" if the identifier
|
|
|
|
is a symbol that already is defined somewhere in the source file up to the
|
|
|
|
current position. Otherwise, the function yields false. As an example, the
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".IFDEF" name=".IFDEF"></tt> statement may be replaced by
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.if .defined(a)
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.DEFINEDMACRO</tt><label id=".DEFINEDMACRO"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Builtin function. The function expects an identifier as argument in parentheses.
|
|
|
|
The argument is evaluated, and the function yields "true" if the identifier
|
|
|
|
already has been defined as the name of a macro. Otherwise, the function yields
|
|
|
|
false. Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.macro add foo
|
|
|
|
clc
|
|
|
|
adc foo
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.if .definedmacro(add)
|
|
|
|
add #$01
|
|
|
|
.else
|
|
|
|
clc
|
|
|
|
adc #$01
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.HIBYTE</tt><label id=".HIBYTE"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The function returns the high byte (that is, bits 8-15) of its argument.
|
|
|
|
It works identical to the '>' operator.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".LOBYTE" name=".LOBYTE"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".BANKBYTE" name=".BANKBYTE"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.HIWORD</tt><label id=".HIWORD"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The function returns the high word (that is, bits 16-31) of its argument.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".LOWORD" name=".LOWORD"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.IDENT</tt><label id=".IDENT"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The function expects a string as its argument, and converts this argument
|
|
|
|
into an identifier. If the string starts with the current <tt/<ref
|
|
|
|
id=".LOCALCHAR" name=".LOCALCHAR">/, it will be converted into a cheap local
|
|
|
|
identifier, otherwise it will be converted into a normal identifier.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro makelabel arg1, arg2
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
.ident (.concat (arg1, arg2)):
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
makelabel "foo", "bar"
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.word foobar ; Valid label
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2021-04-24 17:20:10 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.ISMNEM, .ISMNEMONIC</tt><label id=".ISMNEMONIC"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Builtin function. The function expects an identifier as argument in parentheses.
|
|
|
|
The argument is evaluated, and the function yields "true" if the identifier
|
|
|
|
is defined as an instruction mnemonic that is recognized by the assembler.
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.if .not .ismnemonic(ina)
|
|
|
|
.macro ina
|
|
|
|
clc
|
|
|
|
adc #$01
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.LEFT</tt><label id=".LEFT"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Builtin function. Extracts the left part of a given token list.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Syntax:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.LEFT (<int expr>, <token list>)
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The first integer expression gives the number of tokens to extract from
|
|
|
|
the token list. The second argument is the token list itself. The token
|
|
|
|
list may optionally be enclosed into curly braces. This allows the
|
|
|
|
inclusion of tokens that would otherwise terminate the list (the closing
|
|
|
|
right paren in the given case).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To check in a macro if the given argument has a '#' as first token
|
|
|
|
(immediate addressing mode), use something like this:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro ldax arg
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
.if (.match (.left (1, {arg}), #))
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
; ldax called with immediate operand
|
|
|
|
...
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also the <tt><ref id=".MID" name=".MID"></tt> and <tt><ref id=".RIGHT"
|
|
|
|
name=".RIGHT"></tt> builtin functions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.LOBYTE</tt><label id=".LOBYTE"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The function returns the low byte (that is, bits 0-7) of its argument.
|
|
|
|
It works identical to the '<' operator.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".HIBYTE" name=".HIBYTE"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".BANKBYTE" name=".BANKBYTE"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.LOWORD</tt><label id=".LOWORD"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The function returns the low word (that is, bits 0-15) of its argument.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".HIWORD" name=".HIWORD"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.MATCH</tt><label id=".MATCH"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Builtin function. Matches two token lists against each other. This is
|
|
|
|
most useful within macros, since macros are not stored as strings, but
|
|
|
|
as lists of tokens.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The syntax is
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.MATCH(<token list #1>, <token list #2>)
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Both token list may contain arbitrary tokens with the exception of the
|
|
|
|
terminator token (comma resp. right parenthesis) and
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<itemize>
|
|
|
|
<item>end-of-line
|
|
|
|
<item>end-of-file
|
|
|
|
</itemize>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The token lists may optionally be enclosed into curly braces. This allows
|
|
|
|
the inclusion of tokens that would otherwise terminate the list (the closing
|
|
|
|
right paren in the given case). Often a macro parameter is used for any of
|
|
|
|
the token lists.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please note that the function does only compare tokens, not token
|
|
|
|
attributes. So any number is equal to any other number, regardless of the
|
|
|
|
actual value. The same is true for strings. If you need to compare tokens
|
|
|
|
<em/and/ token attributes, use the <tt><ref id=".XMATCH"
|
|
|
|
name=".XMATCH"></tt> function.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Assume the macro <tt/ASR/, that will shift right the accumulator by one,
|
|
|
|
while honoring the sign bit. The builtin processor instructions will allow
|
|
|
|
an optional "A" for accu addressing for instructions like <tt/ROL/ and
|
|
|
|
<tt/ROR/. We will use the <tt><ref id=".MATCH" name=".MATCH"></tt> function
|
|
|
|
to check for this and print and error for invalid calls.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro asr arg
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.if (.not .blank(arg)) .and (.not .match ({arg}, a))
|
|
|
|
.error "Syntax error"
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
cmp #$80 ; Bit 7 into carry
|
|
|
|
lsr a ; Shift carry into bit 7
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The macro will only accept no arguments, or one argument that must be the
|
|
|
|
reserved keyword "A".
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".XMATCH" name=".XMATCH"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.MAX</tt><label id=".MAX"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Builtin function. The result is the larger of two values.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The syntax is
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.MAX (<value #1>, <value #2>)
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
; Reserve space for the larger of two data blocks
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
savearea: .res .max (.sizeof (foo), .sizeof (bar))
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".MIN" name=".MIN"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.MID</tt><label id=".MID"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Builtin function. Takes a starting index, a count and a token list as
|
|
|
|
arguments. Will return part of the token list.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Syntax:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.MID (<int expr>, <int expr>, <token list>)
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The first integer expression gives the starting token in the list (the first
|
|
|
|
token has index 0). The second integer expression gives the number of tokens
|
|
|
|
to extract from the token list. The third argument is the token list itself.
|
|
|
|
The token list may optionally be enclosed into curly braces. This allows the
|
|
|
|
inclusion of tokens that would otherwise terminate the list (the closing
|
|
|
|
right paren in the given case).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To check in a macro if the given argument has a '<tt/#/' as first token
|
|
|
|
(immediate addressing mode), use something like this:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro ldax arg
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
.if (.match (.mid (0, 1, {arg}), #))
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
; ldax called with immediate operand
|
|
|
|
...
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also the <tt><ref id=".LEFT" name=".LEFT"></tt> and <tt><ref id=".RIGHT"
|
|
|
|
name=".RIGHT"></tt> builtin functions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.MIN</tt><label id=".MIN"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Builtin function. The result is the smaller of two values.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The syntax is
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.MIN (<value #1>, <value #2>)
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2017-09-02 06:11:54 +00:00
|
|
|
; Reserve space for some data, but 256 bytes maximum
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
savearea: .res .min (.sizeof (foo), 256)
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".MAX" name=".MAX"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.REF, .REFERENCED</tt><label id=".REFERENCED"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2021-04-24 17:20:10 +00:00
|
|
|
Builtin function. The function expects an identifier as argument in parentheses.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
The argument is evaluated, and the function yields "true" if the identifier
|
|
|
|
is a symbol that has already been referenced somewhere in the source file up
|
|
|
|
to the current position. Otherwise the function yields false. As an example,
|
|
|
|
the <tt><ref id=".IFREF" name=".IFREF"></tt> statement may be replaced by
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.if .referenced(a)
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".DEFINED" name=".DEFINED"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.RIGHT</tt><label id=".RIGHT"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Builtin function. Extracts the right part of a given token list.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Syntax:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.RIGHT (<int expr>, <token list>)
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The first integer expression gives the number of tokens to extract from the
|
|
|
|
token list. The second argument is the token list itself. The token list
|
|
|
|
may optionally be enclosed into curly braces. This allows the inclusion of
|
|
|
|
tokens that would otherwise terminate the list (the closing right paren in
|
|
|
|
the given case).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also the <tt><ref id=".LEFT" name=".LEFT"></tt> and <tt><ref id=".MID"
|
|
|
|
name=".MID"></tt> builtin functions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.SIZEOF</tt><label id=".SIZEOF"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
<tt/.SIZEOF()/ is a pseudo function that returns the size of its argument.
|
|
|
|
The argument can be a struct/union, a struct member, a scope/procedure, or a
|
|
|
|
label. In the case of a procedure or label, its size is defined by the
|
|
|
|
amount of data placed in the segment where the label is relative to. If a
|
|
|
|
line of code switches segments (for example, in a macro), data placed in
|
|
|
|
other segments does not count for the size.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
Please note that a symbol or scope must exist before it can be used together
|
|
|
|
with <tt/.SIZEOF()/ (that may get relaxed later, but always will be true for
|
|
|
|
scopes). A scope has preference over a symbol with the same name; so, if the
|
|
|
|
last part of a name represents both a scope and a symbol, then the scope is
|
|
|
|
chosen over the symbol.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
After the following code:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.struct Point ; Struct size = 4
|
|
|
|
xcoord .word
|
|
|
|
ycoord .word
|
|
|
|
.endstruct
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
P: .tag Point ; Declare a point
|
|
|
|
@P: .tag Point ; Declare another point
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.code
|
|
|
|
.proc Code
|
|
|
|
nop
|
|
|
|
.proc Inner
|
|
|
|
nop
|
|
|
|
.endproc
|
|
|
|
nop
|
|
|
|
.endproc
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.proc Data
|
|
|
|
.data ; Segment switch!!!
|
|
|
|
.res 4
|
|
|
|
.endproc
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<descrip>
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt/.sizeof(Point)/</tag>
|
|
|
|
will have the value 4, because this is the size of struct <tt/Point/.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt/.sizeof(Point::xcoord)/</tag>
|
|
|
|
will have the value 2, because this is the size of the member <tt/xcoord/
|
|
|
|
in struct <tt/Point/.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt/.sizeof(P)/</tag>
|
|
|
|
will have the value 4, this is the size of the data declared on the same
|
|
|
|
source line as the label <tt/P/, which is in the same segment that <tt/P/
|
|
|
|
is relative to.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt/.sizeof(@P)/</tag>
|
|
|
|
will have the value 4, see above. The example demonstrates that <tt/.SIZEOF/
|
|
|
|
does also work for cheap local symbols.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt/.sizeof(Code)/</tag>
|
|
|
|
will have the value 3, since this is amount of data emitted into the code
|
|
|
|
segment, the segment that was active when <tt/Code/ was entered. Note that
|
|
|
|
this value includes the amount of data emitted in child scopes (in this
|
|
|
|
case <tt/Code::Inner/).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt/.sizeof(Code::Inner)/</tag>
|
|
|
|
will have the value 1 as expected.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt/.sizeof(Data)/</tag>
|
|
|
|
will have the value 0. Data is emitted within the scope <tt/Data/, but since
|
|
|
|
the segment is switched after entry, this data is emitted into another
|
|
|
|
segment.
|
|
|
|
</descrip>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.SPRINTF</tt><label id=".SPRINTF"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Builtin function. It expects a format string as first argument. The number
|
|
|
|
and type of the following arguments depend on the format string. The format
|
|
|
|
string is similar to the one of the C <tt/printf/ function. Missing things
|
|
|
|
are: Length modifiers, variable width.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The result of the function is a string.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
num = 3
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
; Generate an identifier:
|
|
|
|
.ident (.sprintf ("%s%03d", "label", num)):
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2021-04-24 17:48:42 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.STRAT</tt><label id=".STRAT"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Builtin function. The function accepts a string and an index as
|
|
|
|
arguments and returns the value of the character at the given position
|
|
|
|
as an integer value. The index is zero based.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.macro M Arg
|
|
|
|
; Check if the argument string starts with '#'
|
|
|
|
.if (.strat (Arg, 0) = '#')
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.STRING</tt><label id=".STRING"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2021-04-24 17:20:10 +00:00
|
|
|
Builtin function. The function accepts an argument in parentheses and converts
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
this argument into a string constant. The argument may be an identifier, or
|
|
|
|
a constant numeric value.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Since you can use a string in the first place, the use of the function may
|
|
|
|
not be obvious. However, it is useful in macros, or more complex setups.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
; Emulate other assemblers:
|
|
|
|
.macro section name
|
|
|
|
.segment .string(name)
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.STRLEN</tt><label id=".STRLEN"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2021-04-24 17:20:10 +00:00
|
|
|
Builtin function. The function accepts a string argument in parentheses and
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
evaluates to the length of the string.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following macro encodes a string as a pascal style string with
|
|
|
|
a leading length byte.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro PString Arg
|
|
|
|
.byte .strlen(Arg), Arg
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.TCOUNT</tt><label id=".TCOUNT"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2021-04-24 17:20:10 +00:00
|
|
|
Builtin function. The function accepts a token list in parentheses. The function
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
result is the number of tokens given as argument. The token list may
|
|
|
|
optionally be enclosed into curly braces which are not considered part of
|
|
|
|
the list and not counted. Enclosement in curly braces allows the inclusion
|
|
|
|
of tokens that would otherwise terminate the list (the closing right paren
|
|
|
|
in the given case).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The <tt/ldax/ macro accepts the '#' token to denote immediate addressing (as
|
|
|
|
with the normal 6502 instructions). To translate it into two separate 8 bit
|
|
|
|
load instructions, the '#' token has to get stripped from the argument:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro ldax arg
|
|
|
|
.if (.match (.mid (0, 1, {arg}), #))
|
|
|
|
; ldax called with immediate operand
|
|
|
|
lda #<(.right (.tcount ({arg})-1, {arg}))
|
|
|
|
ldx #>(.right (.tcount ({arg})-1, {arg}))
|
|
|
|
.else
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.XMATCH</tt><label id=".XMATCH"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Builtin function. Matches two token lists against each other. This is
|
|
|
|
most useful within macros, since macros are not stored as strings, but
|
|
|
|
as lists of tokens.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The syntax is
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.XMATCH(<token list #1>, <token list #2>)
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Both token list may contain arbitrary tokens with the exception of the
|
|
|
|
terminator token (comma resp. right parenthesis) and
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<itemize>
|
|
|
|
<item>end-of-line
|
|
|
|
<item>end-of-file
|
|
|
|
</itemize>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The token lists may optionally be enclosed into curly braces. This allows
|
|
|
|
the inclusion of tokens that would otherwise terminate the list (the closing
|
|
|
|
right paren in the given case). Often a macro parameter is used for any of
|
|
|
|
the token lists.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The function compares tokens <em/and/ token values. If you need a function
|
|
|
|
that just compares the type of tokens, have a look at the <tt><ref
|
|
|
|
id=".MATCH" name=".MATCH"></tt> function.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".MATCH" name=".MATCH"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect>Control commands<label id="control-commands"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here's a list of all control commands and a description, what they do:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.A16</tt><label id=".A16"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2023-02-21 01:08:58 +00:00
|
|
|
Valid only in 65816 mode. Assume the accumulator is 16 bit.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: This command will not emit any code, it will tell the assembler to
|
|
|
|
create 16 bit operands for immediate accumulator addressing mode.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also: <tt><ref id=".SMART" name=".SMART"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.A8</tt><label id=".A8"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2023-02-21 01:08:58 +00:00
|
|
|
Valid only in 65816 mode. Assume the accumulator is 8 bit.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: This command will not emit any code, it will tell the assembler to
|
|
|
|
create 8 bit operands for immediate accu addressing mode.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also: <tt><ref id=".SMART" name=".SMART"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.ADDR</tt><label id=".ADDR"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define word sized data. In 6502 mode, this is an alias for <tt/.WORD/ and
|
|
|
|
may be used for better readability if the data words are address values. In
|
|
|
|
65816 mode, the address is forced to be 16 bit wide to fit into the current
|
|
|
|
segment. See also <tt><ref id=".FARADDR" name=".FARADDR"></tt>. The command
|
|
|
|
must be followed by a sequence of (not necessarily constant) expressions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.addr $0D00, $AF13, _Clear
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".FARADDR" name=".FARADDR"></tt>, <tt><ref id=".WORD"
|
|
|
|
name=".WORD"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.ALIGN</tt><label id=".ALIGN"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Align data to a given boundary. The command expects a constant integer
|
|
|
|
argument in the range 1 ... 65536, plus an optional second argument
|
|
|
|
in byte range. If there is a second argument, it is used as fill value,
|
|
|
|
otherwise the value defined in the linker configuration file is used
|
|
|
|
(the default for this value is zero).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tt/.ALIGN/ will insert fill bytes, and the number of fill bytes depend of
|
|
|
|
the final address of the segment. <tt/.ALIGN/ cannot insert a variable
|
|
|
|
number of bytes, since that would break address calculations within the
|
|
|
|
module. So each <tt/.ALIGN/ expects the segment to be aligned to a multiple
|
|
|
|
of the alignment, because that allows the number of fill bytes to be
|
|
|
|
calculated in advance by the assembler. You are therefore required to
|
|
|
|
specify a matching alignment for the segment in the linker config. The
|
|
|
|
linker will output a warning if the alignment of the segment is less than
|
|
|
|
what is necessary to have a correct alignment in the object file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.align 256
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some unexpected behaviour might occur if there are multiple <tt/.ALIGN/
|
|
|
|
commands with different arguments. To allow the assembler to calculate the
|
|
|
|
number of fill bytes in advance, the alignment of the segment must be a
|
|
|
|
multiple of each of the alignment factors. This may result in unexpectedly
|
|
|
|
large alignments for the segment within the module.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.align 15
|
|
|
|
.byte 15
|
|
|
|
.align 18
|
|
|
|
.byte 18
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For the assembler to be able to align correctly, the segment must be aligned
|
|
|
|
to the least common multiple of 15 and 18 which is 90. The assembler will
|
|
|
|
calculate this automatically and will mark the segment with this value.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Unfortunately, the combined alignment may get rather large without the user
|
|
|
|
knowing about it, wasting space in the final executable. If we add another
|
|
|
|
alignment to the example above
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.align 15
|
|
|
|
.byte 15
|
|
|
|
.align 18
|
|
|
|
.byte 18
|
|
|
|
.align 251
|
|
|
|
.byte 0
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
the assembler will force a segment alignment to the least common multiple of
|
2023-02-21 11:48:46 +00:00
|
|
|
15, 18 and 251 - which is 22590. To protect the user against errors, when the
|
|
|
|
combined alignment is larger than the explicitly requested alignments,
|
2023-02-21 12:32:38 +00:00
|
|
|
the assembler will issue a warning if it also exceeds 256. The command line
|
2023-02-21 11:48:46 +00:00
|
|
|
option <tt><ref id="option--large-alignment" name="--large-alignment"></tt>
|
|
|
|
will disable this warning.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2023-02-21 12:32:38 +00:00
|
|
|
Please note that with only alignments that are a power of two, a warning will
|
|
|
|
never occur, because the least common multiple of powers to the same base is
|
|
|
|
always simply the larger one.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.ASCIIZ</tt><label id=".ASCIIZ"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define a string with a trailing zero.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
Msg: .asciiz "Hello world"
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This will put the string "Hello world" followed by a binary zero into
|
|
|
|
the current segment. There may be more strings separated by commas, but
|
2021-04-18 20:24:29 +00:00
|
|
|
the binary zero is only appended once (after the last one). Strings will
|
|
|
|
be translated using the current character mapping definition.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".BYTE" name=".BYTE"></tt>,<tt><ref id=".CHARMAP" name=".CHARMAP"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".LITERAL" name=".LITERAL"></tt>
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.ASSERT</tt><label id=".ASSERT"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Add an assertion. The command is followed by an expression, an action
|
|
|
|
specifier, and an optional message that is output in case the assertion
|
|
|
|
fails. If no message was given, the string "Assertion failed" is used. The
|
|
|
|
action specifier may be one of <tt/warning/, <tt/error/, <tt/ldwarning/ or
|
|
|
|
<tt/lderror/. In the former two cases, the assertion is evaluated by the
|
|
|
|
assembler if possible, and in any case, it's also passed to the linker in
|
|
|
|
the object file (if one is generated). The linker will then evaluate the
|
|
|
|
expression when segment placement has been done.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.assert * = $8000, error, "Code not at $8000"
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The example assertion will check that the current location is at $8000,
|
|
|
|
when the output file is written, and abort with an error if this is not
|
|
|
|
the case. More complex expressions are possible. The action specifier
|
|
|
|
<tt/warning/ outputs a warning, while the <tt/error/ specifier outputs
|
|
|
|
an error message. In the latter case, generation of the output file is
|
|
|
|
suppressed in both the assembler and linker.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.AUTOIMPORT</tt><label id=".AUTOIMPORT"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Is followed by a plus or a minus character. When switched on (using a
|
|
|
|
+), undefined symbols are automatically marked as import instead of
|
|
|
|
giving errors. When switched off (which is the default so this does not
|
|
|
|
make much sense), this does not happen and an error message is
|
|
|
|
displayed. The state of the autoimport flag is evaluated when the
|
|
|
|
complete source was translated, before outputting actual code, so it is
|
|
|
|
<em/not/ possible to switch this feature on or off for separate sections
|
|
|
|
of code. The last setting is used for all symbols.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You should probably not use this switch because it delays error
|
|
|
|
messages about undefined symbols until the link stage. The cc65
|
|
|
|
compiler (which is supposed to produce correct assembler code in all
|
|
|
|
circumstances, something which is not true for most assembler
|
|
|
|
programmers) will insert this command to avoid importing each and every
|
|
|
|
routine from the runtime library.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.autoimport + ; Switch on auto import
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.BANKBYTES</tt><label id=".BANKBYTES"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define byte sized data by extracting only the bank byte (that is, bits 16-23) from
|
|
|
|
each expression. This is equivalent to <tt><ref id=".BYTE" name=".BYTE"></tt> with
|
|
|
|
the operator '^' prepended to each expression in its list.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.define MyTable TableItem0, TableItem1, TableItem2, TableItem3
|
|
|
|
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
TableLookupLo: .lobytes MyTable
|
|
|
|
TableLookupHi: .hibytes MyTable
|
|
|
|
TableLookupBank: .bankbytes MyTable
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
which is equivalent to
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
TableLookupLo: .byte <TableItem0, <TableItem1, <TableItem2, <TableItem3
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
TableLookupHi: .byte >TableItem0, >TableItem1, >TableItem2, >TableItem3
|
|
|
|
TableLookupBank: .byte ^TableItem0, ^TableItem1, ^TableItem2, ^TableItem3
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also: <tt><ref id=".BYTE" name=".BYTE"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".HIBYTES" name=".HIBYTES"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".LOBYTES" name=".LOBYTES"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.BSS</tt><label id=".BSS"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Switch to the BSS segment. The name of the BSS segment is always "BSS",
|
|
|
|
so this is a shortcut for
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.segment "BSS"
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also the <tt><ref id=".SEGMENT" name=".SEGMENT"></tt> command.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.BYT, .BYTE</tt><label id=".BYTE"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define byte sized data. Must be followed by a sequence of (byte ranged)
|
2021-04-18 20:24:29 +00:00
|
|
|
expressions or strings. Strings will be translated using the current
|
|
|
|
character mapping definition.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.byte "Hello "
|
|
|
|
.byt "world", $0D, $00
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
2021-04-18 20:24:29 +00:00
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".ASCIIZ" name=".ASCIIZ"></tt>,<tt><ref id=".CHARMAP" name=".CHARMAP"></tt>
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".LITERAL" name=".LITERAL"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.CASE</tt><label id=".CASE"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Switch on or off case sensitivity on identifiers. The default is off
|
|
|
|
(that is, identifiers are case sensitive), but may be changed by the
|
|
|
|
-i switch on the command line.
|
2023-05-03 07:26:10 +00:00
|
|
|
The command can be followed by a '+' or '-' character to switch the
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
option on or off respectively.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.case - ; Identifiers are not case sensitive
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.CHARMAP</tt><label id=".CHARMAP"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2021-04-18 20:24:29 +00:00
|
|
|
Apply a custom mapping for characters for the commands <tt><ref id=".ASCIIZ"
|
|
|
|
name=".ASCIIZ"></tt> and <tt><ref id=".BYTE" name=".BYTE"></tt>. The command
|
|
|
|
is followed by two numbers. The first one is the index of the source character
|
|
|
|
(range 0..255);
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
the second one is the mapping (range 0..255). The mapping applies to all
|
2016-06-11 10:43:19 +00:00
|
|
|
character and string constants <em/when/ they generate output; and, overrides
|
|
|
|
a mapping table specified with the <tt><ref id="option-t" name="-t"></tt>
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
command line switch.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2016-06-11 10:43:19 +00:00
|
|
|
.charmap $41, $61 ; Map 'A' to 'a'
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.CODE</tt><label id=".CODE"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Switch to the CODE segment. The name of the CODE segment is always
|
|
|
|
"CODE", so this is a shortcut for
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.segment "CODE"
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also the <tt><ref id=".SEGMENT" name=".SEGMENT"></tt> command.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.CONDES</tt><label id=".CONDES"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Export a symbol and mark it in a special way. The linker is able to build
|
|
|
|
tables of all such symbols. This may be used to automatically create a list
|
|
|
|
of functions needed to initialize linked library modules.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: The linker has a feature to build a table of marked routines, but it
|
|
|
|
is your code that must call these routines, so just declaring a symbol with
|
|
|
|
<tt/.CONDES/ does nothing by itself.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
All symbols are exported as an absolute (16 bit) symbol. You don't need to
|
|
|
|
use an additional <tt><ref id=".EXPORT" name=".EXPORT"></tt> statement, this
|
|
|
|
is implied by <tt/.CONDES/.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tt/.CONDES/ is followed by the type, which may be <tt/constructor/,
|
|
|
|
<tt/destructor/ or a numeric value between 0 and 6 (where 0 is the same as
|
|
|
|
specifying <tt/constructor/ and 1 is equal to specifying <tt/destructor/).
|
|
|
|
The <tt><ref id=".CONSTRUCTOR" name=".CONSTRUCTOR"></tt>, <tt><ref
|
|
|
|
id=".DESTRUCTOR" name=".DESTRUCTOR"></tt> and <tt><ref id=".INTERRUPTOR"
|
|
|
|
name=".INTERRUPTOR"></tt> commands are actually shortcuts for <tt/.CONDES/
|
|
|
|
with a type of <tt/constructor/ resp. <tt/destructor/ or <tt/interruptor/.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
After the type, an optional priority may be specified. Higher numeric values
|
|
|
|
mean higher priority. If no priority is given, the default priority of 7 is
|
|
|
|
used. Be careful when assigning priorities to your own module constructors
|
|
|
|
so they won't interfere with the ones in the cc65 library.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.condes ModuleInit, constructor
|
|
|
|
.condes ModInit, 0, 16
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See the <tt><ref id=".CONSTRUCTOR" name=".CONSTRUCTOR"></tt>, <tt><ref
|
|
|
|
id=".DESTRUCTOR" name=".DESTRUCTOR"></tt> and <tt><ref id=".INTERRUPTOR"
|
|
|
|
name=".INTERRUPTOR"></tt> commands and the separate section <ref id="condes"
|
|
|
|
name="Module constructors/destructors"> explaining the feature in more
|
|
|
|
detail.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.CONSTRUCTOR</tt><label id=".CONSTRUCTOR"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Export a symbol and mark it as a module constructor. This may be used
|
|
|
|
together with the linker to build a table of constructor subroutines that
|
|
|
|
are called by the startup code.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: The linker has a feature to build a table of marked routines, but it
|
|
|
|
is your code that must call these routines, so just declaring a symbol as
|
|
|
|
constructor does nothing by itself.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A constructor is always exported as an absolute (16 bit) symbol. You don't
|
|
|
|
need to use an additional <tt/.export/ statement, this is implied by
|
|
|
|
<tt/.constructor/. It may have an optional priority that is separated by a
|
|
|
|
comma. Higher numeric values mean a higher priority. If no priority is
|
|
|
|
given, the default priority of 7 is used. Be careful when assigning
|
|
|
|
priorities to your own module constructors so they won't interfere with the
|
|
|
|
ones in the cc65 library.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.constructor ModuleInit
|
|
|
|
.constructor ModInit, 16
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See the <tt><ref id=".CONDES" name=".CONDES"></tt> and <tt><ref
|
|
|
|
id=".DESTRUCTOR" name=".DESTRUCTOR"></tt> commands and the separate section
|
|
|
|
<ref id="condes" name="Module constructors/destructors"> explaining the
|
|
|
|
feature in more detail.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.DATA</tt><label id=".DATA"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Switch to the DATA segment. The name of the DATA segment is always
|
|
|
|
"DATA", so this is a shortcut for
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.segment "DATA"
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also the <tt><ref id=".SEGMENT" name=".SEGMENT"></tt> command.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.DBYT</tt><label id=".DBYT"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define word sized data with the hi and lo bytes swapped (use <tt/.WORD/ to
|
|
|
|
create word sized data in native 65XX format). Must be followed by a
|
|
|
|
sequence of (word ranged) expressions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.dbyt $1234, $4512
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This will emit the bytes
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
$12 $34 $45 $12
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
into the current segment in that order.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.DEBUGINFO</tt><label id=".DEBUGINFO"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Switch on or off debug info generation. The default is off (that is,
|
|
|
|
the object file will not contain debug infos), but may be changed by the
|
|
|
|
-g switch on the command line.
|
2023-05-03 07:26:10 +00:00
|
|
|
The command can be followed by a '+' or '-' character to switch the
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
option on or off respectively.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.debuginfo + ; Generate debug info
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.DEFINE</tt><label id=".DEFINE"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Start a define style macro definition. The command is followed by an
|
|
|
|
identifier (the macro name) and optionally by a list of formal arguments
|
2021-04-24 17:20:10 +00:00
|
|
|
in parentheses.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please note that <tt/.DEFINE/ shares most disadvantages with its C
|
|
|
|
counterpart, so the general advice is, <bf/NOT/ do use <tt/.DEFINE/ if you
|
|
|
|
don't have to.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also the <tt><ref id=".UNDEFINE" name=".UNDEFINE"></tt> command and
|
|
|
|
section <ref id="macros" name="Macros">.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.DELMAC, .DELMACRO</tt><label id=".DELMACRO"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Delete a classic macro (defined with <tt><ref id=".MACRO"
|
|
|
|
name=".MACRO"></tt>) . The command is followed by the name of an
|
|
|
|
existing macro. Its definition will be deleted together with the name.
|
|
|
|
If necessary, another macro with this name may be defined later.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".ENDMACRO" name=".ENDMACRO"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".EXITMACRO" name=".EXITMACRO"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".MACRO" name=".MACRO"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also section <ref id="macros" name="Macros">.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.DESTRUCTOR</tt><label id=".DESTRUCTOR"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Export a symbol and mark it as a module destructor. This may be used
|
|
|
|
together with the linker to build a table of destructor subroutines that
|
|
|
|
are called by the startup code.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: The linker has a feature to build a table of marked routines, but it
|
|
|
|
is your code that must call these routines, so just declaring a symbol as
|
|
|
|
constructor does nothing by itself.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A destructor is always exported as an absolute (16 bit) symbol. You don't
|
|
|
|
need to use an additional <tt/.export/ statement, this is implied by
|
|
|
|
<tt/.destructor/. It may have an optional priority that is separated by a
|
|
|
|
comma. Higher numerical values mean a higher priority. If no priority is
|
|
|
|
given, the default priority of 7 is used. Be careful when assigning
|
|
|
|
priorities to your own module destructors so they won't interfere with the
|
|
|
|
ones in the cc65 library.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.destructor ModuleDone
|
|
|
|
.destructor ModDone, 16
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See the <tt><ref id=".CONDES" name=".CONDES"></tt> and <tt><ref
|
|
|
|
id=".CONSTRUCTOR" name=".CONSTRUCTOR"></tt> commands and the separate
|
|
|
|
section <ref id="condes" name="Module constructors/destructors"> explaining
|
|
|
|
the feature in more detail.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.DWORD</tt><label id=".DWORD"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define dword sized data (4 bytes) Must be followed by a sequence of
|
|
|
|
expressions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.dword $12344512, $12FA489
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.ELSE</tt><label id=".ELSE"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Conditional assembly: Reverse the current condition.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.ELSEIF</tt><label id=".ELSEIF"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Conditional assembly: Reverse current condition and test a new one.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.END</tt><label id=".END"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Forced end of assembly. Assembly stops at this point, even if the command
|
|
|
|
is read from an include file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.ENDENUM</tt><label id=".ENDENUM"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
End a <tt><ref id=".ENUM" name=".ENUM"></tt> declaration.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.ENDIF</tt><label id=".ENDIF"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Conditional assembly: Close a <tt><ref id=".IF" name=".IF..."></tt> or
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".ELSE" name=".ELSE"></tt> branch.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.ENDMAC, .ENDMACRO</tt><label id=".ENDMACRO"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2023-03-02 02:55:14 +00:00
|
|
|
Marks the end of a macro definition. Note, <tt>.ENDMACRO</tt> should be on
|
2023-03-02 02:47:50 +00:00
|
|
|
its own line to successfully end the macro definition. It is possible to use
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".DEFINE" name=".DEFINE"></tt> to create a symbol that references
|
|
|
|
<tt>.ENDMACRO</tt> without ending the macro definition.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.macro new_mac
|
|
|
|
.define startmac .macro
|
|
|
|
.define endmac .endmacro
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".DELMACRO" name=".DELMACRO"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".EXITMACRO" name=".EXITMACRO"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".MACRO" name=".MACRO"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also section <ref id="macros" name="Macros">.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.ENDPROC</tt><label id=".ENDPROC"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
End of the local lexical level (see <tt><ref id=".PROC" name=".PROC"></tt>).
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.ENDREP, .ENDREPEAT</tt><label id=".ENDREPEAT"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
End a <tt><ref id=".REPEAT" name=".REPEAT"></tt> block.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.ENDSCOPE</tt><label id=".ENDSCOPE"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
End of the local lexical level (see <tt/<ref id=".SCOPE" name=".SCOPE">/).
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.ENDSTRUCT</tt><label id=".ENDSTRUCT"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Ends a struct definition. See the <tt/<ref id=".STRUCT" name=".STRUCT">/
|
|
|
|
command and the separate section named <ref id="structs" name=""Structs
|
|
|
|
and unions"">.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.ENDUNION</tt><label id=".ENDUNION"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Ends a union definition. See the <tt/<ref id=".UNION" name=".UNION">/
|
|
|
|
command and the separate section named <ref id="structs" name=""Structs
|
|
|
|
and unions"">.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.ENUM</tt><label id=".ENUM"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Start an enumeration. This directive is very similar to the C <tt/enum/
|
|
|
|
keyword. If a name is given, a new scope is created for the enumeration,
|
|
|
|
otherwise the enumeration members are placed in the enclosing scope.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In the enumeration body, symbols are declared. The first symbol has a value
|
2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
of zero, and each following symbol will get the value of the preceding, plus
|
|
|
|
one. That behaviour may be overridden by an explicit assignment. Two symbols
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
may have the same value.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.enum errorcodes
|
|
|
|
no_error
|
|
|
|
file_error
|
|
|
|
parse_error
|
|
|
|
.endenum
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
The above example will create a new scope named <tt/errorcodes/ with three
|
|
|
|
symbols in it that get the values 0, 1, and 2 respectively. Another way
|
|
|
|
to write that would have been:
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.scope errorcodes
|
|
|
|
no_error = 0
|
|
|
|
file_error = 1
|
|
|
|
parse_error = 2
|
|
|
|
.endscope
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please note that explicit scoping must be used to access the identifiers:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.word errorcodes::no_error
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A more complex example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.enum
|
|
|
|
EUNKNOWN = -1
|
|
|
|
EOK
|
|
|
|
EFILE
|
|
|
|
EBUSY
|
|
|
|
EAGAIN
|
|
|
|
EWOULDBLOCK = EAGAIN
|
|
|
|
.endenum
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
In that example, the enumeration does not have a name, which means that the
|
|
|
|
members will be visible in the enclosing scope, and can be used in that scope
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
without explicit scoping. The first member (<tt/EUNKNOWN/) has the value -1.
|
2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
The values for the following members are incremented by one; so, <tt/EOK/
|
|
|
|
would be zero, and so on. <tt/EWOULDBLOCK/ is an alias for <tt/EAGAIN/; so,
|
|
|
|
it has an override for the value, using an already defined symbol.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.ERROR</tt><label id=".ERROR"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Force an assembly error. The assembler will output an error message
|
|
|
|
preceded by "User error". Assembly is continued but no object file will
|
|
|
|
generated.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This command may be used to check for initial conditions that must be
|
|
|
|
set before assembling a source file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.if foo = 1
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
.elseif bar = 1
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
.else
|
|
|
|
.error "Must define foo or bar!"
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also: <tt><ref id=".FATAL" name=".FATAL"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".OUT" name=".OUT"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".WARNING" name=".WARNING"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.EXITMAC, .EXITMACRO</tt><label id=".EXITMACRO"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Abort a macro expansion immediately. This command is often useful in
|
|
|
|
recursive macros.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".DELMACRO" name=".DELMACRO"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".ENDMACRO" name=".ENDMACRO"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".MACRO" name=".MACRO"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also section <ref id="macros" name="Macros">.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.EXPORT</tt><label id=".EXPORT"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Make symbols accessible from other modules. Must be followed by a comma
|
|
|
|
separated list of symbols to export, with each one optionally followed by an
|
|
|
|
address specification and (also optional) an assignment. Using an additional
|
|
|
|
assignment in the export statement allows to define and export a symbol in
|
|
|
|
one statement. The default is to export the symbol with the address size it
|
|
|
|
actually has. The assembler will issue a warning, if the symbol is exported
|
|
|
|
with an address size smaller than the actual address size.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Examples:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.export foo
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
.export bar: far
|
|
|
|
.export foobar: far = foo * bar
|
|
|
|
.export baz := foobar, zap: far = baz - bar
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
As with constant definitions, using <tt/:=/ instead of <tt/=/ marks the
|
|
|
|
symbols as a label.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".EXPORTZP" name=".EXPORTZP"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.EXPORTZP</tt><label id=".EXPORTZP"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Make symbols accessible from other modules. Must be followed by a comma
|
|
|
|
separated list of symbols to export. The exported symbols are explicitly
|
|
|
|
marked as zero page symbols. An assignment may be included in the
|
|
|
|
<tt/.EXPORTZP/ statement. This allows to define and export a symbol in one
|
|
|
|
statement.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Examples:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.exportzp foo, bar
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
.exportzp baz := $02
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".EXPORT" name=".EXPORT"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.FARADDR</tt><label id=".FARADDR"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define far (24 bit) address data. The command must be followed by a
|
|
|
|
sequence of (not necessarily constant) expressions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.faraddr DrawCircle, DrawRectangle, DrawHexagon
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".ADDR" name=".ADDR"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.FATAL</tt><label id=".FATAL"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Force an assembly error and terminate assembly. The assembler will output an
|
|
|
|
error message preceded by "User error" and will terminate assembly
|
|
|
|
immediately.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This command may be used to check for initial conditions that must be
|
|
|
|
set before assembling a source file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.if foo = 1
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
.elseif bar = 1
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
.else
|
|
|
|
.fatal "Must define foo or bar!"
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also: <tt><ref id=".ERROR" name=".ERROR"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".OUT" name=".OUT"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".WARNING" name=".WARNING"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.FEATURE</tt><label id=".FEATURE"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This directive may be used to enable one or more compatibility features
|
|
|
|
of the assembler. While the use of <tt/.FEATURE/ should be avoided when
|
|
|
|
possible, it may be useful when porting sources written for other
|
2023-02-24 23:00:58 +00:00
|
|
|
assemblers. After the feature name an optional '+' or '-' may specify whether
|
|
|
|
to enable or disable the feature (enable if omitted). Multiple features may be
|
|
|
|
enabled, separated by commas. Examples:
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2023-02-24 23:00:58 +00:00
|
|
|
; enable c_comments
|
|
|
|
.feature c_comments
|
|
|
|
.feature c_comments +
|
|
|
|
; enable force_range, disable underline_in_numbers, enable labels_without_colons
|
|
|
|
.feature force_range, underline_in_numbers -, labels_without_colons +
|
|
|
|
.feature force_range +, underline_in_numbers off, labels_without_colons on
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following features are available:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<descrip>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>at_in_identifiers</tt><label id="at_in_identifiers"></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
2019-01-05 19:57:12 +00:00
|
|
|
Accept the at character ('@') as a valid character in identifiers. The
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
at character is not allowed to start an identifier, even with this
|
|
|
|
feature enabled.
|
|
|
|
|
2016-02-25 20:40:31 +00:00
|
|
|
<tag><tt>bracket_as_indirect</tt><label id="bracket_as_indirect"></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
2016-02-26 16:10:11 +00:00
|
|
|
Use <tt>[]</tt> instead of <tt>()</tt> for the indirect addressing modes.
|
2016-02-25 20:40:31 +00:00
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
lda [$82]
|
|
|
|
lda [$82,x]
|
|
|
|
lda [$82],y
|
2016-02-26 16:10:11 +00:00
|
|
|
jmp [$fffe]
|
|
|
|
jmp [table,x]
|
2016-02-25 20:40:31 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
<em/Note:/ This should not be used in 65186 mode because it conflicts with
|
|
|
|
the 65816 instruction syntax for far addressing. See the section covering
|
|
|
|
<tt/<ref id="address-sizes" name="address sizes">/ for more information.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<tag><tt>c_comments</tt><label id="c_comments"></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Allow C like comments using <tt>/*</tt> and <tt>*/</tt> as left and right
|
|
|
|
comment terminators. Note that C comments may not be nested. There's also a
|
|
|
|
pitfall when using C like comments: All statements must be terminated by
|
|
|
|
"end-of-line". Using C like comments, it is possible to hide the newline,
|
|
|
|
which results in error messages. See the following non working example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
lda #$00 /* This comment hides the newline
|
|
|
|
*/ sta $82
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>dollar_in_identifiers</tt><label id="dollar_in_identifiers"></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
2019-01-05 19:57:12 +00:00
|
|
|
Accept the dollar sign ('$') as a valid character in identifiers. The
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
dollar character is not allowed to start an identifier, even with this
|
|
|
|
feature enabled.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>dollar_is_pc</tt><label id="dollar_is_pc"></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
2019-01-05 19:57:12 +00:00
|
|
|
The dollar sign may be used as an alias for the star ('*'), which
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
gives the value of the current PC in expressions.
|
|
|
|
Note: Assignment to the pseudo variable is not allowed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>force_range</tt><label id="force_range"></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Force expressions into their valid range for immediate addressing and
|
|
|
|
storage operators like <tt><ref id=".BYTE" name=".BYTE"></tt> and
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".WORD" name=".WORD"></tt>. Be very careful with this one,
|
|
|
|
since it will completely disable error checks.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>labels_without_colons</tt><label id="labels_without_colons"></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Allow labels without a trailing colon. These labels are only accepted,
|
|
|
|
if they start at the beginning of a line (no leading white space).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>leading_dot_in_identifiers</tt><label id="leading_dot_in_identifiers"></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
2019-01-05 19:57:12 +00:00
|
|
|
Accept the dot ('.') as the first character of an identifier. This may be
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
used for example to create macro names that start with a dot emulating
|
|
|
|
control directives of other assemblers. Note however, that none of the
|
|
|
|
reserved keywords built into the assembler, that starts with a dot, may be
|
|
|
|
overridden. When using this feature, you may also get into trouble if
|
|
|
|
later versions of the assembler define new keywords starting with a dot.
|
|
|
|
|
2023-09-23 15:45:27 +00:00
|
|
|
<tag><tt>line_continuations</tt><label id="line_continuations"></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Switch on or off line continuations using the backslash character
|
|
|
|
before a newline. The option is off by default.
|
|
|
|
Note: Line continuations do not work in a comment. A backslash at the
|
|
|
|
end of a comment is treated as part of the comment and does not trigger
|
|
|
|
line continuation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.feature line_continuations + ; Allow line continuations
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
lda \
|
|
|
|
#$20 ; This is legal now
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For backward compatibility reasons, the <tt>.LINECONT +</tt> control command
|
|
|
|
is also supported and enables the same feature.
|
|
|
|
|
2023-02-21 09:00:34 +00:00
|
|
|
<tag><tt>long_jsr_jmp_rts</tt><label id="long_jsr_jmp_rts"></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Affects 65816 mode only.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Allows <tt>jsr</tt> and <tt>jmp</tt> to produce long jumps if the target
|
|
|
|
address has been previously declared in a <tt>far</tt> segment,
|
|
|
|
or imported as <tt>far</tt>.
|
|
|
|
Otherwise <tt>jsl</tt> and <tt>jml</tt> must be used instead.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Also allows <tt><ref id=".SMART" name=".SMART"></tt> to convert <tt>rts</tt>
|
|
|
|
to a long return <tt>rtl</tt> when the enclosing scope or memory model
|
|
|
|
indicates returning from a <tt>far</tt> procedure.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This permits compatibility with the old behavior of this assembler, or other
|
|
|
|
assemblers which similarly allowed <tt>jsr</tt> and <tt>jmp</tt> to be used
|
|
|
|
this way.
|
|
|
|
|
2015-04-21 20:09:01 +00:00
|
|
|
<tag><tt>loose_char_term</tt><label id="loose_char_term"></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accept single quotes as well as double quotes as terminators for char
|
|
|
|
constants.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<tag><tt>loose_string_term</tt><label id="loose_string_term"></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accept single quotes as well as double quotes as terminators for string
|
|
|
|
constants.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>missing_char_term</tt><label id="missing_char_term"></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accept single quoted character constants where the terminating quote is
|
|
|
|
missing.
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
lda #'a
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
2014-04-24 17:03:52 +00:00
|
|
|
<em/Note:/ This does not work in conjunction with <tt/.FEATURE
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
loose_string_term/, since in this case the input would be ambiguous.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>org_per_seg</tt><label id="org_per_seg"></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This feature makes relocatable/absolute mode local to the current segment.
|
|
|
|
Using <tt><ref id=".ORG" name=".ORG"></tt> when <tt/org_per_seg/ is in
|
|
|
|
effect will only enable absolute mode for the current segment. Dito for
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".RELOC" name=".RELOC"></tt>.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>pc_assignment</tt><label id="pc_assignment"></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
2019-01-05 19:57:12 +00:00
|
|
|
Allow assignments to the PC symbol ('*' or '$' if <tt/dollar_is_pc/
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
is enabled). Such an assignment is handled identical to the <tt><ref
|
|
|
|
id=".ORG" name=".ORG"></tt> command (which is usually not needed, so just
|
|
|
|
removing the lines with the assignments may also be an option when porting
|
|
|
|
code written for older assemblers).
|
|
|
|
|
2019-01-05 19:29:54 +00:00
|
|
|
<tag><tt>string_escapes</tt><label id="string_escapes"></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Allow C-style backslash escapes within string constants to embed
|
|
|
|
special characters. The following escapes are accepted:
|
2019-01-30 17:18:32 +00:00
|
|
|
<itemize>
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>\\</tt> backslash (<tt>$5C</tt>)
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>\'</tt> single quote (<tt>$27</tt>)
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>\"</tt> double quote (<tt>$22</tt>)
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>\t</tt> tab (<tt>$09</tt>)
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>\r</tt> carriage return (<tt>$0D</tt>)
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>\n</tt> newline (<tt>$0A</tt>)
|
|
|
|
<item><tt>\xNN</tt> (<tt>$NN</tt>)
|
|
|
|
</itemize>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that string escapes are converted to platform-specific characters in
|
|
|
|
the same way that other characters are converted.
|
2019-01-05 19:29:54 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<tag><tt>ubiquitous_idents</tt><label id="ubiquitous_idents"></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Allow the use of instructions names as names for macros and symbols. This
|
|
|
|
makes it possible to "overload" instructions by defining a macro with the
|
|
|
|
same name. This does also make it possible to introduce hard to find errors
|
|
|
|
in your code, so be careful!
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tag><tt>underline_in_numbers</tt><label id="underline_in_numbers"></tag>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Allow underlines within numeric constants. These may be used for grouping
|
|
|
|
the digits of numbers for easier reading.
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.feature underline_in_numbers
|
|
|
|
.word %1100001110100101
|
|
|
|
.word %1100_0011_1010_0101 ; Identical but easier to read
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</descrip>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
It is also possible to specify features on the command line using the
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id="option--feature" name="--feature"></tt> command line option.
|
|
|
|
This is useful when translating sources written for older assemblers, when
|
|
|
|
you don't want to change the source code.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
As an example, to translate sources written for Andre Fachats xa65
|
|
|
|
assembler, the features
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
labels_without_colons, pc_assignment, loose_char_term
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
may be helpful. They do not make ca65 completely compatible, so you may not
|
|
|
|
be able to translate the sources without changes, even when enabling these
|
|
|
|
features. However, I have found several sources that translate without
|
|
|
|
problems when enabling these features on the command line.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.FILEOPT, .FOPT</tt><label id=".FOPT"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Insert an option string into the object file. There are two forms of
|
|
|
|
this command, one specifies the option by a keyword, the second
|
|
|
|
specifies it as a number. Since usage of the second one needs knowledge
|
|
|
|
of the internal encoding, its use is not recommended and I will only
|
|
|
|
describe the first form here.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The command is followed by one of the keywords
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
author
|
|
|
|
comment
|
|
|
|
compiler
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
a comma and a string. The option is written into the object file
|
|
|
|
together with the string value. This is currently unidirectional and
|
|
|
|
there is no way to actually use these options once they are in the
|
|
|
|
object file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Examples:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.fileopt comment, "Code stolen from my brother"
|
|
|
|
.fileopt compiler, "BASIC 2.0"
|
|
|
|
.fopt author, "J. R. User"
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.FORCEIMPORT</tt><label id=".FORCEIMPORT"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Import an absolute symbol from another module. The command is followed by a
|
|
|
|
comma separated list of symbols to import. The command is similar to <tt>
|
|
|
|
<ref id=".IMPORT" name=".IMPORT"></tt>, but the import reference is always
|
|
|
|
written to the generated object file, even if the symbol is never referenced
|
|
|
|
(<tt><ref id=".IMPORT" name=".IMPORT"></tt> will not generate import
|
|
|
|
references for unused symbols).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.forceimport needthisone, needthistoo
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".IMPORT" name=".IMPORT"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.GLOBAL</tt><label id=".GLOBAL"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Declare symbols as global. Must be followed by a comma separated list of
|
|
|
|
symbols to declare. Symbols from the list, that are defined somewhere in the
|
|
|
|
source, are exported, all others are imported. Additional <tt><ref
|
|
|
|
id=".IMPORT" name=".IMPORT"></tt> or <tt><ref id=".EXPORT"
|
|
|
|
name=".EXPORT"></tt> commands for the same symbol are allowed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.global foo, bar
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.GLOBALZP</tt><label id=".GLOBALZP"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Declare symbols as global. Must be followed by a comma separated list of
|
|
|
|
symbols to declare. Symbols from the list, that are defined somewhere in the
|
|
|
|
source, are exported, all others are imported. Additional <tt><ref
|
|
|
|
id=".IMPORTZP" name=".IMPORTZP"></tt> or <tt><ref id=".EXPORTZP"
|
|
|
|
name=".EXPORTZP"></tt> commands for the same symbol are allowed. The symbols
|
|
|
|
in the list are explicitly marked as zero page symbols.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.globalzp foo, bar
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.HIBYTES</tt><label id=".HIBYTES"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define byte sized data by extracting only the high byte (that is, bits 8-15) from
|
|
|
|
each expression. This is equivalent to <tt><ref id=".BYTE" name=".BYTE"></tt> with
|
|
|
|
the operator '>' prepended to each expression in its list.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.lobytes $1234, $2345, $3456, $4567
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.hibytes $fedc, $edcb, $dcba, $cba9
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
which is equivalent to
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.byte $34, $45, $56, $67
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.byte $fe, $ed, $dc, $cb
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.define MyTable TableItem0, TableItem1, TableItem2, TableItem3
|
|
|
|
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
TableLookupLo: .lobytes MyTable
|
|
|
|
TableLookupHi: .hibytes MyTable
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
which is equivalent to
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
TableLookupLo: .byte <TableItem0, <TableItem1, <TableItem2, <TableItem3
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
TableLookupHi: .byte >TableItem0, >TableItem1, >TableItem2, >TableItem3
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also: <tt><ref id=".BYTE" name=".BYTE"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".LOBYTES" name=".LOBYTES"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".BANKBYTES" name=".BANKBYTES"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.I16</tt><label id=".I16"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2023-02-21 01:08:58 +00:00
|
|
|
Valid only in 65816 mode. Assume the index registers are 16 bit.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: This command will not emit any code, it will tell the assembler to
|
|
|
|
create 16 bit operands for immediate operands.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also the <tt><ref id=".I8" name=".I8"></tt> and <tt><ref id=".SMART"
|
|
|
|
name=".SMART"></tt> commands.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.I8</tt><label id=".I8"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2023-02-21 01:08:58 +00:00
|
|
|
Valid only in 65816 mode. Assume the index registers are 8 bit.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: This command will not emit any code, it will tell the assembler to
|
|
|
|
create 8 bit operands for immediate operands.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also the <tt><ref id=".I16" name=".I16"></tt> and <tt><ref id=".SMART"
|
|
|
|
name=".SMART"></tt> commands.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.IF</tt><label id=".IF"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Conditional assembly: Evaluate an expression and switch assembler output
|
|
|
|
on or off depending on the expression. The expression must be a constant
|
|
|
|
expression, that is, all operands must be defined.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A expression value of zero evaluates to FALSE, any other value evaluates
|
|
|
|
to TRUE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.IFBLANK</tt><label id=".IFBLANK"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Conditional assembly: Check if there are any remaining tokens in this line,
|
|
|
|
and evaluate to FALSE if this is the case, and to TRUE otherwise. If the
|
|
|
|
condition is not true, further lines are not assembled until an <tt><ref
|
2016-12-27 17:45:40 +00:00
|
|
|
id=".ELSE" name=".ELSE"></tt>, <tt><ref id=".ELSEIF" name=".ELSEIF"></tt> or
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".ENDIF" name=".ENDIF"></tt> directive.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This command is often used to check if a macro parameter was given. Since an
|
|
|
|
empty macro parameter will evaluate to nothing, the condition will evaluate
|
|
|
|
to TRUE if an empty parameter was given.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro arg1, arg2
|
|
|
|
.ifblank arg2
|
|
|
|
lda #arg1
|
|
|
|
.else
|
|
|
|
lda #arg2
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also: <tt><ref id=".BLANK" name=".BLANK"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.IFCONST</tt><label id=".IFCONST"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Conditional assembly: Evaluate an expression and switch assembler output
|
|
|
|
on or off depending on the constness of the expression.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A const expression evaluates to to TRUE, a non const expression (one
|
|
|
|
containing an imported or currently undefined symbol) evaluates to
|
|
|
|
FALSE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also: <tt><ref id=".CONST" name=".CONST"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.IFDEF</tt><label id=".IFDEF"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Conditional assembly: Check if a symbol is defined. Must be followed by
|
2022-02-21 20:44:31 +00:00
|
|
|
a symbol name. The condition is true if the given symbol is already
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
defined, and false otherwise.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also: <tt><ref id=".DEFINED" name=".DEFINED"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.IFNBLANK</tt><label id=".IFNBLANK"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Conditional assembly: Check if there are any remaining tokens in this line,
|
|
|
|
and evaluate to TRUE if this is the case, and to FALSE otherwise. If the
|
|
|
|
condition is not true, further lines are not assembled until an <tt><ref
|
|
|
|
id=".ELSE" name=".ELSE"></tt>, <tt><ref id=".ELSEIF" name=".ELSEIF"></tt> or
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".ENDIF" name=".ENDIF"></tt> directive.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This command is often used to check if a macro parameter was given.
|
|
|
|
Since an empty macro parameter will evaluate to nothing, the condition
|
|
|
|
will evaluate to FALSE if an empty parameter was given.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro arg1, arg2
|
|
|
|
lda #arg1
|
|
|
|
.ifnblank arg2
|
|
|
|
lda #arg2
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also: <tt><ref id=".BLANK" name=".BLANK"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.IFNDEF</tt><label id=".IFNDEF"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Conditional assembly: Check if a symbol is defined. Must be followed by
|
2022-02-21 20:44:31 +00:00
|
|
|
a symbol name. The condition is true if the given symbol is not
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
defined, and false otherwise.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also: <tt><ref id=".DEFINED" name=".DEFINED"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.IFNREF</tt><label id=".IFNREF"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Conditional assembly: Check if a symbol is referenced. Must be followed
|
2022-02-21 20:54:47 +00:00
|
|
|
by a symbol name. The condition is true if the given symbol was
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
not referenced before, and false otherwise.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also: <tt><ref id=".REFERENCED" name=".REFERENCED"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.IFP02</tt><label id=".IFP02"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Conditional assembly: Check if the assembler is currently in 6502 mode
|
|
|
|
(see <tt><ref id=".P02" name=".P02"></tt> command).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2016-09-07 17:21:24 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.IFP4510</tt><label id=".IFP4510"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Conditional assembly: Check if the assembler is currently in 4510 mode
|
|
|
|
(see <tt><ref id=".P4510" name=".P4510"></tt> command).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.IFP816</tt><label id=".IFP816"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Conditional assembly: Check if the assembler is currently in 65816 mode
|
|
|
|
(see <tt><ref id=".P816" name=".P816"></tt> command).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.IFPC02</tt><label id=".IFPC02"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Conditional assembly: Check if the assembler is currently in 65C02 mode
|
|
|
|
(see <tt><ref id=".PC02" name=".PC02"></tt> command).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2020-11-16 21:16:14 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.IFPDTV</tt><label id=".IFPDTV"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Conditional assembly: Check if the assembler is currently in 6502DTV mode
|
|
|
|
(see <tt><ref id=".PDTV" name=".PDTV"></tt> command).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.IFPSC02</tt><label id=".IFPSC02"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Conditional assembly: Check if the assembler is currently in 65SC02 mode
|
|
|
|
(see <tt><ref id=".PSC02" name=".PSC02"></tt> command).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.IFREF</tt><label id=".IFREF"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Conditional assembly: Check if a symbol is referenced. Must be followed
|
2022-02-21 20:54:47 +00:00
|
|
|
by a symbol name. The condition is true if the given symbol was
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
referenced before, and false otherwise.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This command may be used to build subroutine libraries in include files
|
|
|
|
(you may use separate object modules for this purpose too).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.ifref ToHex ; If someone used this subroutine
|
|
|
|
ToHex: tay ; Define subroutine
|
|
|
|
lda HexTab,y
|
|
|
|
rts
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
2021-04-24 18:26:52 +00:00
|
|
|
See also: <tt><ref id=".REFERENCED" name=".REFERENCED"></tt>, and
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".REFERTO" name=".REFERTO"></tt>
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.IMPORT</tt><label id=".IMPORT"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Import a symbol from another module. The command is followed by a comma
|
|
|
|
separated list of symbols to import, with each one optionally followed by
|
|
|
|
an address specification.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.import foo
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
.import bar: zeropage
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".IMPORTZP" name=".IMPORTZP"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.IMPORTZP</tt><label id=".IMPORTZP"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Import a symbol from another module. The command is followed by a comma
|
|
|
|
separated list of symbols to import. The symbols are explicitly imported
|
|
|
|
as zero page symbols (that is, symbols with values in byte range).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.importzp foo, bar
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".IMPORT" name=".IMPORT"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.INCBIN</tt><label id=".INCBIN"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Include a file as binary data. The command expects a string argument
|
|
|
|
that is the name of a file to include literally in the current segment.
|
|
|
|
In addition to that, a start offset and a size value may be specified,
|
|
|
|
separated by commas. If no size is specified, all of the file from the
|
|
|
|
start offset to end-of-file is used. If no start position is specified
|
|
|
|
either, zero is assumed (which means that the whole file is inserted).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
; Include whole file
|
|
|
|
.incbin "sprites.dat"
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
; Include file starting at offset 256
|
|
|
|
.incbin "music.dat", $100
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
; Read 100 bytes starting at offset 200
|
|
|
|
.incbin "graphics.dat", 200, 100
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.INCLUDE</tt><label id=".INCLUDE"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Include another file. Include files may be nested up to a depth of 16.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.include "subs.inc"
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.INTERRUPTOR</tt><label id=".INTERRUPTOR"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Export a symbol and mark it as an interruptor. This may be used together
|
|
|
|
with the linker to build a table of interruptor subroutines that are called
|
|
|
|
in an interrupt.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: The linker has a feature to build a table of marked routines, but it
|
|
|
|
is your code that must call these routines, so just declaring a symbol as
|
|
|
|
interruptor does nothing by itself.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
An interruptor is always exported as an absolute (16 bit) symbol. You don't
|
|
|
|
need to use an additional <tt/.export/ statement, this is implied by
|
|
|
|
<tt/.interruptor/. It may have an optional priority that is separated by a
|
|
|
|
comma. Higher numeric values mean a higher priority. If no priority is
|
|
|
|
given, the default priority of 7 is used. Be careful when assigning
|
|
|
|
priorities to your own module constructors so they won't interfere with the
|
|
|
|
ones in the cc65 library.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.interruptor IrqHandler
|
|
|
|
.interruptor Handler, 16
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See the <tt><ref id=".CONDES" name=".CONDES"></tt> command and the separate
|
|
|
|
section <ref id="condes" name="Module constructors/destructors"> explaining
|
|
|
|
the feature in more detail.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.LIST</tt><label id=".LIST"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2023-05-03 07:26:10 +00:00
|
|
|
Enable output to the listing. The command can be followed by a boolean
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
switch ("on", "off", "+" or "-") and will enable or disable listing
|
|
|
|
output.
|
|
|
|
The option has no effect if the listing is not enabled by the command line
|
|
|
|
switch -l. If -l is used, an internal counter is set to 1. Lines are output
|
|
|
|
to the listing file, if the counter is greater than zero, and suppressed if
|
|
|
|
the counter is zero. Each use of <tt/.LIST/ will increment or decrement the
|
|
|
|
counter.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.list on ; Enable listing output
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.LISTBYTES</tt><label id=".LISTBYTES"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Set, how many bytes are shown in the listing for one source line. The
|
|
|
|
default is 12, so the listing will show only the first 12 bytes for any
|
|
|
|
source line that generates more than 12 bytes of code or data.
|
|
|
|
The directive needs an argument, which is either "unlimited", or an
|
|
|
|
integer constant in the range 4..255.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Examples:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.listbytes unlimited ; List all bytes
|
|
|
|
.listbytes 12 ; List the first 12 bytes
|
|
|
|
.incbin "data.bin" ; Include large binary file
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2021-04-18 20:24:29 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.LITERAL</tt><label id=".LITERAL"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define byte sized data. Must be followed by a sequence of (byte ranged)
|
|
|
|
expressions or strings. Strings will disregard the current character
|
|
|
|
mapping definition and will be interpreted literally.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.literal "Hello "
|
|
|
|
.literal "world", $0D, $00
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".ASCIIZ" name=".ASCIIZ"></tt>,<tt><ref id=".BYTE" name=".BYTE"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.LOBYTES</tt><label id=".LOBYTES"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define byte sized data by extracting only the low byte (that is, bits 0-7) from
|
|
|
|
each expression. This is equivalent to <tt><ref id=".BYTE" name=".BYTE"></tt> with
|
|
|
|
the operator '<' prepended to each expression in its list.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.lobytes $1234, $2345, $3456, $4567
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.hibytes $fedc, $edcb, $dcba, $cba9
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
which is equivalent to
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.byte $34, $45, $56, $67
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.byte $fe, $ed, $dc, $cb
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.define MyTable TableItem0, TableItem1, TableItem2, TableItem3
|
|
|
|
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
TableLookupLo: .lobytes MyTable
|
|
|
|
TableLookupHi: .hibytes MyTable
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
which is equivalent to
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
TableLookupLo: .byte <TableItem0, <TableItem1, <TableItem2, <TableItem3
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
TableLookupHi: .byte >TableItem0, >TableItem1, >TableItem2, >TableItem3
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also: <tt><ref id=".BYTE" name=".BYTE"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".HIBYTES" name=".HIBYTES"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".BANKBYTES" name=".BANKBYTES"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.LOCAL</tt><label id=".LOCAL"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This command may only be used inside a macro definition. It declares a
|
|
|
|
list of identifiers as local to the macro expansion.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A problem when using macros are labels: Since they don't change their name,
|
|
|
|
you get a "duplicate symbol" error if the macro is expanded the second time.
|
|
|
|
Labels declared with <tt><ref id=".LOCAL" name=".LOCAL"></tt> have their
|
|
|
|
name mapped to an internal unique name (<tt/___ABCD__/) with each macro
|
|
|
|
invocation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some other assemblers start a new lexical block inside a macro expansion.
|
|
|
|
This has some drawbacks however, since that will not allow <em/any/ symbol
|
|
|
|
to be visible outside a macro, a feature that is sometimes useful. The
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".LOCAL" name=".LOCAL"></tt> command is in my eyes a better way
|
|
|
|
to address the problem.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You get an error when using <tt><ref id=".LOCAL" name=".LOCAL"></tt> outside
|
|
|
|
a macro.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.LOCALCHAR</tt><label id=".LOCALCHAR"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Defines the character that start "cheap" local labels. You may use one
|
|
|
|
of '@' and '?' as start character. The default is '@'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cheap local labels are labels that are visible only between two non
|
|
|
|
cheap labels. This way you can reuse identifiers like "<tt/loop/" without
|
|
|
|
using explicit lexical nesting.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.localchar '?'
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Clear: lda #$00 ; Global label
|
|
|
|
?Loop: sta Mem,y ; Local label
|
|
|
|
dey
|
|
|
|
bne ?Loop ; Ok
|
|
|
|
rts
|
|
|
|
Sub: ... ; New global label
|
|
|
|
bne ?Loop ; ERROR: Unknown identifier!
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.MACPACK</tt><label id=".MACPACK"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Insert a predefined macro package. The command is followed by an
|
|
|
|
identifier specifying the macro package to insert. Available macro
|
|
|
|
packages are:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
atari Defines the scrcode macro.
|
|
|
|
cbm Defines the scrcode macro.
|
|
|
|
cpu Defines constants for the .CPU variable.
|
2019-08-26 19:16:22 +00:00
|
|
|
generic Defines generic macros like add, sub, and blt.
|
|
|
|
longbranch Defines conditional long-jump macros.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Including a macro package twice, or including a macro package that
|
|
|
|
redefines already existing macros will lead to an error.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.macpack longbranch ; Include macro package
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
cmp #$20 ; Set condition codes
|
|
|
|
jne Label ; Jump long on condition
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Macro packages are explained in more detail in section <ref
|
|
|
|
id="macropackages" name="Macro packages">.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.MAC, .MACRO</tt><label id=".MACRO"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Start a classic macro definition. The command is followed by an identifier
|
|
|
|
(the macro name) and optionally by a comma separated list of identifiers
|
|
|
|
that are macro parameters. A macro definition is terminated by <tt><ref
|
|
|
|
id=".ENDMACRO" name=".ENDMACRO"></tt>.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro ldax arg ; Define macro ldax
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
lda arg
|
|
|
|
ldx arg+1
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".DELMACRO" name=".DELMACRO"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".ENDMACRO" name=".ENDMACRO"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".EXITMACRO" name=".EXITMACRO"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also section <ref id="macros" name="Macros">.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.ORG</tt><label id=".ORG"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Start a section of absolute code. The command is followed by a constant
|
|
|
|
expression that gives the new PC counter location for which the code is
|
|
|
|
assembled. Use <tt><ref id=".RELOC" name=".RELOC"></tt> to switch back to
|
|
|
|
relocatable code.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
By default, absolute/relocatable mode is global (valid even when switching
|
|
|
|
segments). Using <tt>.FEATURE <ref id="org_per_seg" name="org_per_seg"></tt>
|
|
|
|
it can be made segment local.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please note that you <em/do not need/ <tt/.ORG/ in most cases. Placing
|
|
|
|
code at a specific address is the job of the linker, not the assembler, so
|
|
|
|
there is usually no reason to assemble code to a specific address.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.org $7FF ; Emit code starting at $7FF
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.OUT</tt><label id=".OUT"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Output a string to the console without producing an error. This command
|
|
|
|
is similar to <tt/.ERROR/, however, it does not force an assembler error
|
|
|
|
that prevents the creation of an object file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.out "This code was written by the codebuster(tm)"
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also: <tt><ref id=".ERROR" name=".ERROR"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".FATAL" name=".FATAL"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".WARNING" name=".WARNING"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.P02</tt><label id=".P02"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enable the 6502 instruction set, disable 65SC02, 65C02 and 65816
|
|
|
|
instructions. This is the default if not overridden by the
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id="option--cpu" name="--cpu"></tt> command line option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".PC02" name=".PC02"></tt>, <tt><ref id=".PSC02"
|
2016-09-07 17:21:24 +00:00
|
|
|
name=".PSC02"></tt>, <tt><ref id=".P816" name=".P816"></tt> and
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".P4510" name=".P4510"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.P4510</tt><label id=".P4510"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enable the 4510 instruction set. This is a superset of the 65C02 and
|
|
|
|
6502 instruction sets.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".P02" name=".P02"></tt>, <tt><ref id=".PSC02"
|
|
|
|
name=".PSC02"></tt>, <tt><ref id=".PC02" name=".PC02"></tt> and
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".P816" name=".P816"></tt>
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.P816</tt><label id=".P816"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enable the 65816 instruction set. This is a superset of the 65SC02 and
|
|
|
|
6502 instruction sets.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".P02" name=".P02"></tt>, <tt><ref id=".PSC02"
|
2016-09-07 17:21:24 +00:00
|
|
|
name=".PSC02"></tt>, <tt><ref id=".PC02" name=".PC02"></tt> and
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".P4510" name=".P4510"></tt>
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.PAGELEN, .PAGELENGTH</tt><label id=".PAGELENGTH"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Set the page length for the listing. Must be followed by an integer
|
|
|
|
constant. The value may be "unlimited", or in the range 32 to 127. The
|
|
|
|
statement has no effect if no listing is generated. The default value is -1
|
|
|
|
(unlimited) but may be overridden by the <tt/--pagelength/ command line
|
|
|
|
option. Beware: Since ca65 is a one pass assembler, the listing is generated
|
|
|
|
after assembly is complete, you cannot use multiple line lengths with one
|
|
|
|
source. Instead, the value set with the last <tt/.PAGELENGTH/ is used.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Examples:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.pagelength 66 ; Use 66 lines per listing page
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.pagelength unlimited ; Unlimited page length
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.PC02</tt><label id=".PC02"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enable the 65C02 instructions set. This instruction set includes all
|
|
|
|
6502 and 65SC02 instructions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".P02" name=".P02"></tt>, <tt><ref id=".PSC02"
|
2016-09-07 17:21:24 +00:00
|
|
|
name=".PSC02"></tt>, <tt><ref id=".P816" name=".P816"></tt> and
|
2016-09-23 08:39:47 +00:00
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".P4510" name=".P4510"></tt>
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2020-11-16 21:16:14 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.PDTV</tt><label id=".PDTV"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2022-04-17 14:05:10 +00:00
|
|
|
Enable the 6502DTV instruction set. This is a superset of the 6502
|
2020-11-16 21:16:14 +00:00
|
|
|
instruction set.
|
|
|
|
|
2020-11-19 20:22:40 +00:00
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".P02" name=".P02"></tt>
|
2020-11-16 21:16:14 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2021-04-18 17:18:39 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.POPCHARMAP</tt><label id=".POPCHARMAP"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Pop the last character mapping from the stack, and activate it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This command will switch back to the character mapping that was last pushed onto the
|
|
|
|
character mapping stack using the <tt><ref id=".PUSHCHARMAP" name=".PUSHCHARMAP"></tt>
|
|
|
|
command, and remove this entry from the stack.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The assembler will print an error message if the mappting stack is empty when
|
|
|
|
this command is issued.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".CHARMAP" name=".CHARMAP"></tt>, <tt><ref id=".PUSHCHARMAP"
|
|
|
|
name=".PUSHCHARMAP"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.POPCPU</tt><label id=".POPCPU"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Pop the last CPU setting from the stack, and activate it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This command will switch back to the CPU that was last pushed onto the CPU
|
|
|
|
stack using the <tt><ref id=".PUSHCPU" name=".PUSHCPU"></tt> command, and
|
|
|
|
remove this entry from the stack.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The assembler will print an error message if the CPU stack is empty when
|
|
|
|
this command is issued.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".CPU" name=".CPU"></tt>, <tt><ref id=".PUSHCPU"
|
|
|
|
name=".PUSHCPU"></tt>, <tt><ref id=".SETCPU" name=".SETCPU"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.POPSEG</tt><label id=".POPSEG"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Pop the last pushed segment from the stack, and set it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This command will switch back to the segment that was last pushed onto the
|
|
|
|
segment stack using the <tt><ref id=".PUSHSEG" name=".PUSHSEG"></tt>
|
|
|
|
command, and remove this entry from the stack.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The assembler will print an error message if the segment stack is empty
|
|
|
|
when this command is issued.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".PUSHSEG" name=".PUSHSEG"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.PROC</tt><label id=".PROC"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Start a nested lexical level with the given name and adds a symbol with this
|
|
|
|
name to the enclosing scope. All new symbols from now on are in the local
|
|
|
|
lexical level and are accessible from outside only via <ref id="scopesyntax"
|
|
|
|
name="explicit scope specification">. Symbols defined outside this local
|
|
|
|
level may be accessed as long as their names are not used for new symbols
|
|
|
|
inside the level. Symbols names in other lexical levels do not clash, so you
|
|
|
|
may use the same names for identifiers. The lexical level ends when the
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".ENDPROC" name=".ENDPROC"></tt> command is read. Lexical levels
|
|
|
|
may be nested up to a depth of 16 (this is an artificial limit to protect
|
|
|
|
against errors in the source).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: Macro names are always in the global level and in a separate name
|
|
|
|
space. There is no special reason for this, it's just that I've never
|
|
|
|
had any need for local macro definitions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.proc Clear ; Define Clear subroutine, start new level
|
|
|
|
lda #$00
|
|
|
|
L1: sta Mem,y ; L1 is local and does not cause a
|
|
|
|
; duplicate symbol error if used in other
|
|
|
|
; places
|
|
|
|
dey
|
|
|
|
bne L1 ; Reference local symbol
|
|
|
|
rts
|
|
|
|
.endproc ; Leave lexical level
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt/<ref id=".ENDPROC" name=".ENDPROC">/ and <tt/<ref id=".SCOPE"
|
|
|
|
name=".SCOPE">/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.PSC02</tt><label id=".PSC02"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enable the 65SC02 instructions set. This instruction set includes all
|
|
|
|
6502 instructions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".P02" name=".P02"></tt>, <tt><ref id=".PC02"
|
2016-09-07 17:21:24 +00:00
|
|
|
name=".PC02"></tt>, <tt><ref id=".P816" name=".P816"></tt> and
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".P4510" name=".P4510"></tt>
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2021-04-18 17:18:39 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.PUSHCHARMAP</tt><label id=".PUSHCHARMAP"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Push the currently active character mapping onto a stack. The stack has a size of 16
|
|
|
|
entries.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tt/.PUSHCHARMAP/ allows together with <tt><ref id=".POPCHARMAP"
|
|
|
|
name=".POPCHARMAP"></tt> to switch to another character mapping and to restore the old
|
2022-02-03 00:01:10 +00:00
|
|
|
character mapping later, without knowledge of the current mapping.
|
2021-04-18 17:18:39 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The assembler will print an error message if the character mapping stack is already full,
|
|
|
|
when this command is issued.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".CHARMAP" name=".CHARMAP"></tt>, <tt><ref id=".POPCHARMAP"
|
|
|
|
name=".POPCHARMAP"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.PUSHCPU</tt><label id=".PUSHCPU"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Push the currently active CPU onto a stack. The stack has a size of 8
|
|
|
|
entries.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tt/.PUSHCPU/ allows together with <tt><ref id=".POPCPU"
|
|
|
|
name=".POPCPU"></tt> to switch to another CPU and to restore the old CPU
|
|
|
|
later, without knowledge of the current CPU setting.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The assembler will print an error message if the CPU stack is already full,
|
|
|
|
when this command is issued.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".CPU" name=".CPU"></tt>, <tt><ref id=".POPCPU"
|
|
|
|
name=".POPCPU"></tt>, <tt><ref id=".SETCPU" name=".SETCPU"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.PUSHSEG</tt><label id=".PUSHSEG"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Push the currently active segment onto a stack. The entries on the stack
|
|
|
|
include the name of the segment and the segment type. The stack has a size
|
|
|
|
of 16 entries.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tt/.PUSHSEG/ allows together with <tt><ref id=".POPSEG" name=".POPSEG"></tt>
|
|
|
|
to switch to another segment and to restore the old segment later, without
|
|
|
|
even knowing the name and type of the current segment.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The assembler will print an error message if the segment stack is already
|
|
|
|
full, when this command is issued.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".POPSEG" name=".POPSEG"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2021-04-28 18:38:23 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.REFERTO, .REFTO</tt><label id=".REFERTO"><p>
|
2021-04-24 18:26:52 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Mark a symbol as referenced.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
It is useful in combination with the <tt><ref id=".IFREF" name=".IFREF"></tt>
|
|
|
|
command. A subroutine with two entry points can be created. When the first
|
|
|
|
entry point is called, it sets some default value as an argument, and falls
|
|
|
|
through into the second entry point. <tt>.REFERTO</tt> helps to ensure that
|
|
|
|
the second part is included into binary when only the first entry point is
|
|
|
|
actually used from the code.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2021-04-28 18:38:23 +00:00
|
|
|
.ifref NegateValue ; If this subroutine is used
|
|
|
|
NegateValue: ; Define it
|
|
|
|
lda #0
|
|
|
|
sec
|
|
|
|
sbc Value
|
|
|
|
.ifref ResetValue ; If the ResetValue is also used
|
|
|
|
jmp SetValue ; Jump over it
|
|
|
|
.else
|
|
|
|
.refto SetValue ; Ensure that SetValue will be included
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
|
2021-04-24 18:26:52 +00:00
|
|
|
.ifref ResetValue ; If this subroutine is used
|
|
|
|
ResetValue: ; Define it
|
|
|
|
lda #0 ; Set a default value
|
2021-04-28 18:38:23 +00:00
|
|
|
.refto SetValue ; Ensure that SetValue will be included
|
2021-04-24 18:26:52 +00:00
|
|
|
.endif
|
2021-04-28 18:38:23 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2021-04-24 18:26:52 +00:00
|
|
|
.ifref SetValue ; If this or previous subroutine is used
|
|
|
|
SetValue:
|
|
|
|
sta Value
|
|
|
|
rts
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.RELOC</tt><label id=".RELOC"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Switch back to relocatable mode. See the <tt><ref id=".ORG"
|
|
|
|
name=".ORG"></tt> command.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.REPEAT</tt><label id=".REPEAT"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Repeat all commands between <tt/.REPEAT/ and <tt><ref id=".ENDREPEAT"
|
|
|
|
name=".ENDREPEAT"></tt> constant number of times. The command is followed by
|
|
|
|
a constant expression that tells how many times the commands in the body
|
|
|
|
should get repeated. Optionally, a comma and an identifier may be specified.
|
|
|
|
If this identifier is found in the body of the repeat statement, it is
|
|
|
|
replaced by the current repeat count (starting with zero for the first time
|
|
|
|
the body is repeated).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tt/.REPEAT/ statements may be nested. If you use the same repeat count
|
|
|
|
identifier for a nested <tt/.REPEAT/ statement, the one from the inner
|
|
|
|
level will be used, not the one from the outer level.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following macro will emit a string that is "encrypted" in that all
|
|
|
|
characters of the string are XORed by the value $55.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro Crypt Arg
|
|
|
|
.repeat .strlen(Arg), I
|
|
|
|
.byte .strat(Arg, I) ^ $55
|
|
|
|
.endrep
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".ENDREPEAT" name=".ENDREPEAT"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.RES</tt><label id=".RES"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Reserve storage. The command is followed by one or two constant
|
|
|
|
expressions. The first one is mandatory and defines, how many bytes of
|
2024-12-15 14:28:44 +00:00
|
|
|
storage should be defined. The second, optional expression must be a
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
constant byte value that will be used as value of the data. If there
|
|
|
|
is no fill value given, the linker will use the value defined in the
|
|
|
|
linker configuration file (default: zero).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
; Reserve 12 bytes of memory with value $AA
|
|
|
|
.res 12, $AA
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.RODATA</tt><label id=".RODATA"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Switch to the RODATA segment. The name of the RODATA segment is always
|
|
|
|
"RODATA", so this is a shortcut for
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.segment "RODATA"
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The RODATA segment is a segment that is used by the compiler for
|
|
|
|
readonly data like string constants.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also the <tt><ref id=".SEGMENT" name=".SEGMENT"></tt> command.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.SCOPE</tt><label id=".SCOPE"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Start a nested lexical level with the given name. All new symbols from now
|
|
|
|
on are in the local lexical level and are accessible from outside only via
|
|
|
|
<ref id="scopesyntax" name="explicit scope specification">. Symbols defined
|
|
|
|
outside this local level may be accessed as long as their names are not used
|
|
|
|
for new symbols inside the level. Symbols names in other lexical levels do
|
|
|
|
not clash, so you may use the same names for identifiers. The lexical level
|
|
|
|
ends when the <tt><ref id=".ENDSCOPE" name=".ENDSCOPE"></tt> command is
|
|
|
|
read. Lexical levels may be nested up to a depth of 16 (this is an
|
|
|
|
artificial limit to protect against errors in the source).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: Macro names are always in the global level and in a separate name
|
|
|
|
space. There is no special reason for this, it's just that I've never
|
|
|
|
had any need for local macro definitions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.scope Error ; Start new scope named Error
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
None = 0 ; No error
|
|
|
|
File = 1 ; File error
|
|
|
|
Parse = 2 ; Parse error
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.endscope ; Close lexical level
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
lda #Error::File ; Use symbol from scope Error
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt/<ref id=".ENDSCOPE" name=".ENDSCOPE">/ and <tt/<ref id=".PROC"
|
|
|
|
name=".PROC">/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.SEGMENT</tt><label id=".SEGMENT"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Switch to another segment. Code and data is always emitted into a
|
|
|
|
segment, that is, a named section of data. The default segment is
|
|
|
|
"CODE". There may be up to 254 different segments per object file
|
|
|
|
(and up to 65534 per executable). There are shortcut commands for
|
2015-08-01 09:50:13 +00:00
|
|
|
the most common segments ("ZEROPAGE", "CODE", "RODATA", "DATA", and "BSS").
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The command is followed by a string containing the segment name (there are
|
|
|
|
some constraints for the name - as a rule of thumb use only those segment
|
|
|
|
names that would also be valid identifiers). There may also be an optional
|
|
|
|
address size separated by a colon. See the section covering <tt/<ref
|
|
|
|
id="address-sizes" name="address sizes">/ for more information.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The default address size for a segment depends on the memory model specified
|
|
|
|
on the command line. The default is "absolute", which means that you don't
|
|
|
|
have to use an address size modifier in most cases.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
"absolute" means that the is a segment with 16 bit (absolute) addressing.
|
|
|
|
That is, the segment will reside somewhere in core memory outside the zero
|
|
|
|
page. "zeropage" (8 bit) means that the segment will be placed in the zero
|
|
|
|
page and direct (short) addressing is possible for data in this segment.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Beware: Only labels in a segment with the zeropage attribute are marked
|
2019-01-05 19:57:12 +00:00
|
|
|
as reachable by short addressing. The '*' (PC counter) operator will
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
work as in other segments and will create absolute variable values.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please note that a segment cannot have two different address sizes. A
|
|
|
|
segment specified as zeropage cannot be declared as being absolute later.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Examples:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.segment "ROM2" ; Switch to ROM2 segment
|
|
|
|
.segment "ZP2": zeropage ; New direct segment
|
|
|
|
.segment "ZP2" ; Ok, will use last attribute
|
|
|
|
.segment "ZP2": absolute ; Error, redecl mismatch
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".BSS" name=".BSS"></tt>, <tt><ref id=".CODE"
|
2015-08-01 09:50:13 +00:00
|
|
|
name=".CODE"></tt>, <tt><ref id=".DATA" name=".DATA"></tt>, <tt><ref
|
|
|
|
id=".RODATA" name=".RODATA"></tt>, and <tt><ref id=".ZEROPAGE"
|
|
|
|
name=".ZEROPAGE"></tt>
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.SET</tt><label id=".SET"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tt/.SET/ is used to assign a value to a variable. See <ref id="variables"
|
|
|
|
name="Numeric variables"> for a full description.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.SETCPU</tt><label id=".SETCPU"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Switch the CPU instruction set. The command is followed by a string that
|
|
|
|
specifies the CPU. Possible values are those that can also be supplied to
|
|
|
|
the <tt><ref id="option--cpu" name="--cpu"></tt> command line option,
|
2020-11-16 21:16:14 +00:00
|
|
|
namely: 6502, 6502X, 6502DTV, 65SC02, 65C02, 65816, 4510 and HuC6280.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".CPU" name=".CPU"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".IFP02" name=".IFP02"></tt>,
|
2020-11-16 21:16:14 +00:00
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".IFPDTV" name=".IFPDTV"></tt>,
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".IFP816" name=".IFP816"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".IFPC02" name=".IFPC02"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".IFPSC02" name=".IFPSC02"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".P02" name=".P02"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".P816" name=".P816"></tt>,
|
2016-09-12 16:38:10 +00:00
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".P4510" name=".P4510"></tt>,
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".PC02" name=".PC02"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".PSC02" name=".PSC02"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.SMART</tt><label id=".SMART"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2023-05-03 07:26:10 +00:00
|
|
|
Switch on or off smart mode. The command can be followed by a '+' or '-'
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
character to switch the option on or off respectively. The default is off
|
|
|
|
(that is, the assembler doesn't try to be smart), but this default may be
|
|
|
|
changed by the -s switch on the command line.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In smart mode the assembler will do the following:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<itemize>
|
|
|
|
<item>Track usage of the <tt/REP/ and <tt/SEP/ instructions in 65816 mode
|
|
|
|
and update the operand sizes accordingly. If the operand of such an
|
|
|
|
instruction cannot be evaluated by the assembler (for example, because
|
|
|
|
the operand is an imported symbol), a warning is issued. Beware: Since
|
|
|
|
the assembler cannot trace the execution flow this may lead to false
|
|
|
|
results in some cases. If in doubt, use the <tt/.Inn/ and <tt/.Ann/
|
|
|
|
instructions to tell the assembler about the current settings.
|
2023-02-21 09:00:34 +00:00
|
|
|
<item>In 65816 mode, if the <tt><ref id="long_jsr_jmp_rts"
|
|
|
|
name="long_jsr_jmp_rts"></tt> feature is enabled,
|
|
|
|
smart mode will replace a <tt/RTS/ instruction by <tt/RTL/ if it is
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
used within a procedure declared as <tt/far/, or if the procedure has
|
|
|
|
no explicit address specification, but it is <tt/far/ because of the
|
|
|
|
memory model used.
|
|
|
|
</itemize>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.smart ; Be smart
|
|
|
|
.smart - ; Stop being smart
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".A16" name=".A16"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".A8" name=".A8"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".I16" name=".I16"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".I8" name=".I8"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.STRUCT</tt><label id=".STRUCT"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Starts a struct definition. Structs are covered in a separate section named
|
|
|
|
<ref id="structs" name=""Structs and unions"">.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also: <tt><ref id=".ENDSTRUCT" name=".ENDSTRUCT"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".ENDUNION" name=".ENDUNION"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".UNION" name=".UNION"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.TAG</tt><label id=".TAG"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2023-12-17 00:18:25 +00:00
|
|
|
Allocate space for a struct or union. This is equivalent to
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".RES" name=".RES"></tt> with the
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".SIZEOF" name=".SIZEOF"></tt> of a struct.
|
2023-12-17 00:25:21 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.struct Point
|
|
|
|
xcoord .word
|
|
|
|
ycoord .word
|
|
|
|
.endstruct
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.bss
|
|
|
|
.tag Point ; Allocate 4 bytes
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
2023-12-17 00:18:25 +00:00
|
|
|
See: <ref id="structs" name=""Structs and unions"">
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.UNDEF, .UNDEFINE</tt><label id=".UNDEFINE"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Delete a define style macro definition. The command is followed by an
|
|
|
|
identifier which specifies the name of the macro to delete. Macro
|
|
|
|
replacement is switched of when reading the token following the command
|
|
|
|
(otherwise the macro name would be replaced by its replacement list).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also the <tt><ref id=".DEFINE" name=".DEFINE"></tt> command and
|
|
|
|
section <ref id="macros" name="Macros">.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.UNION</tt><label id=".UNION"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Starts a union definition. Unions are covered in a separate section named
|
|
|
|
<ref id="structs" name=""Structs and unions"">.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also: <tt><ref id=".ENDSTRUCT" name=".ENDSTRUCT"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".ENDUNION" name=".ENDUNION"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".STRUCT" name=".STRUCT"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.WARNING</tt><label id=".WARNING"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Force an assembly warning. The assembler will output a warning message
|
|
|
|
preceded by "User warning". This warning will always be output, even if
|
|
|
|
other warnings are disabled with the <tt><ref id="option-W" name="-W0"></tt>
|
|
|
|
command line option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This command may be used to output possible problems when assembling
|
|
|
|
the source file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro jne target
|
|
|
|
.local L1
|
|
|
|
.ifndef target
|
|
|
|
.warning "Forward jump in jne, cannot optimize!"
|
|
|
|
beq L1
|
|
|
|
jmp target
|
|
|
|
L1:
|
|
|
|
.else
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See also: <tt><ref id=".ERROR" name=".ERROR"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".FATAL" name=".FATAL"></tt>,
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".OUT" name=".OUT"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.WORD</tt><label id=".WORD"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Define word sized data. Must be followed by a sequence of (word ranged,
|
|
|
|
but not necessarily constant) expressions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.word $0D00, $AF13, _Clear
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.ZEROPAGE</tt><label id=".ZEROPAGE"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Switch to the ZEROPAGE segment and mark it as direct (zeropage) segment.
|
|
|
|
The name of the ZEROPAGE segment is always "ZEROPAGE", so this is a
|
|
|
|
shortcut for
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-08-01 09:50:13 +00:00
|
|
|
.segment "ZEROPAGE": zeropage
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Because of the "zeropage" attribute, labels declared in this segment are
|
|
|
|
addressed using direct addressing mode if possible. You <em/must/ instruct
|
|
|
|
the linker to place this segment somewhere in the address range 0..$FF
|
|
|
|
otherwise you will get errors.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See: <tt><ref id=".SEGMENT" name=".SEGMENT"></tt>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect>Macros<label id="macros"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Introduction<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Macros may be thought of as "parametrized super instructions". Macros are
|
|
|
|
sequences of tokens that have a name. If that name is used in the source
|
|
|
|
file, the macro is "expanded", that is, it is replaced by the tokens that
|
|
|
|
were specified when the macro was defined.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Macros without parameters<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In its simplest form, a macro does not have parameters. Here's an
|
|
|
|
example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro asr ; Arithmetic shift right
|
|
|
|
cmp #$80 ; Put bit 7 into carry
|
|
|
|
ror ; Rotate right with carry
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The macro above consists of two real instructions, that are inserted into
|
|
|
|
the code, whenever the macro is expanded. Macro expansion is simply done
|
|
|
|
by using the name, like this:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
lda $2010
|
|
|
|
asr
|
|
|
|
sta $2010
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Parametrized macros<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When using macro parameters, macros can be even more useful:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro inc16 addr
|
|
|
|
clc
|
|
|
|
lda addr
|
|
|
|
adc #<$0001
|
|
|
|
sta addr
|
|
|
|
lda addr+1
|
|
|
|
adc #>$0001
|
|
|
|
sta addr+1
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When calling the macro, you may give a parameter, and each occurrence of
|
|
|
|
the name "addr" in the macro definition will be replaced by the given
|
|
|
|
parameter. So
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
inc16 $1000
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
will be expanded to
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
clc
|
|
|
|
lda $1000
|
|
|
|
adc #<$0001
|
|
|
|
sta $1000
|
|
|
|
lda $1000+1
|
|
|
|
adc #>$0001
|
|
|
|
sta $1000+1
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A macro may have more than one parameter, in this case, the parameters
|
|
|
|
are separated by commas. You are free to give less parameters than the
|
|
|
|
macro actually takes in the definition. You may also leave intermediate
|
|
|
|
parameters empty. Empty parameters are replaced by empty space (that is,
|
|
|
|
they are removed when the macro is expanded). If you have a look at our
|
|
|
|
macro definition above, you will see, that replacing the "addr" parameter
|
2023-05-03 07:05:14 +00:00
|
|
|
by nothing will lead to wrong code in most lines.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The names "a", "x" and "y" should be avoided for macro parameters, as these
|
|
|
|
will usually conflict with the 6502 registers.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For writing macros with a variable parameter list, control commands are
|
|
|
|
available:
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".IFBLANK" name=".IFBLANK"></tt> tests the rest of the line and
|
|
|
|
returns true, if there are any tokens on the remainder of the line. Since
|
|
|
|
empty parameters are replaced by nothing, this may be used to test if a given
|
|
|
|
parameter is empty. <tt><ref id=".IFNBLANK" name=".IFNBLANK"></tt> tests the
|
|
|
|
opposite.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Look at this example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2023-05-03 07:05:14 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro ldaxy i, j, k
|
|
|
|
.ifnblank i
|
|
|
|
lda #i
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
.endif
|
2023-05-03 07:05:14 +00:00
|
|
|
.ifnblank j
|
|
|
|
ldx #j
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
.endif
|
2023-05-03 07:05:14 +00:00
|
|
|
.ifnblank k
|
|
|
|
ldy #k
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
That macro may be called as follows:
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
ldaxy 1, 2, 3 ; Load all three registers
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
ldaxy 1, , 3 ; Load only a and y
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
ldaxy , , 3 ; Load y only
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
There's another helper command for determining which macro parameters are
|
|
|
|
valid: <tt><ref id=".PARAMCOUNT" name=".PARAMCOUNT"></tt>. That command is
|
|
|
|
replaced by the parameter count given, <em/including/ explicitly empty
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
parameters:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
ldaxy 1 ; .PARAMCOUNT = 1
|
|
|
|
ldaxy 1,,3 ; .PARAMCOUNT = 3
|
|
|
|
ldaxy 1,2 ; .PARAMCOUNT = 2
|
|
|
|
ldaxy 1, ; .PARAMCOUNT = 2
|
|
|
|
ldaxy 1,2,3 ; .PARAMCOUNT = 3
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Macro parameters may optionally be enclosed into curly braces. This allows the
|
|
|
|
inclusion of tokens that would otherwise terminate the parameter (the comma in
|
|
|
|
case of a macro parameter).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro foo arg1, arg2
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
foo ($00,x) ; Two parameters passed
|
|
|
|
foo {($00,x)} ; One parameter passed
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In the first case, the macro is called with two parameters: '<tt/($00/'
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
and '<tt/x)/'. The comma is not passed to the macro, because it is part of the
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
calling sequence, not the parameters.
|
|
|
|
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
In the second case, '<tt/($00,x)/' is passed to the macro; this time,
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
including the comma.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Detecting parameter types<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sometimes it is nice to write a macro that acts differently depending on the
|
|
|
|
type of the argument supplied. An example would be a macro that loads a 16 bit
|
|
|
|
value from either an immediate operand, or from memory. The <tt/<ref
|
|
|
|
id=".MATCH" name=".MATCH">/ and <tt/<ref id=".XMATCH" name=".XMATCH">/
|
|
|
|
functions will allow you to do exactly this:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro ldax arg
|
|
|
|
.if (.match (.left (1, {arg}), #))
|
|
|
|
; immediate mode
|
|
|
|
lda #<(.right (.tcount ({arg})-1, {arg}))
|
|
|
|
ldx #>(.right (.tcount ({arg})-1, {arg}))
|
|
|
|
.else
|
|
|
|
; assume absolute or zero page
|
|
|
|
lda arg
|
|
|
|
ldx 1+(arg)
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Using the <tt/<ref id=".MATCH" name=".MATCH">/ function, the macro is able to
|
|
|
|
check if its argument begins with a hash mark. If so, two immediate loads are
|
|
|
|
emitted, Otherwise a load from an absolute zero page memory location is
|
|
|
|
assumed. Please note how the curly braces are used to enclose parameters to
|
|
|
|
pseudo functions handling token lists. This is necessary, because the token
|
|
|
|
lists may include commas or parens, which would be treated by the assembler
|
|
|
|
as end-of-list.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The macro can be used as
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
foo: .word $5678
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
ldax #$1234 ; X=$12, A=$34
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
ldax foo ; X=$56, A=$78
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Recursive macros<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Macros may be used recursively:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro push r1, r2, r3
|
|
|
|
lda r1
|
|
|
|
pha
|
|
|
|
.ifnblank r2
|
|
|
|
push r2, r3
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
There's also a special macro command to help with writing recursive macros:
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".EXITMACRO" name=".EXITMACRO"></tt>. That command will stop macro
|
|
|
|
expansion immediately:
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro push r1, r2, r3, r4, r5, r6, r7
|
|
|
|
.ifblank r1
|
|
|
|
; First parameter is empty
|
|
|
|
.exitmacro
|
|
|
|
.else
|
|
|
|
lda r1
|
|
|
|
pha
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
push r2, r3, r4, r5, r6, r7
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
When expanding that macro, the expansion will push all given parameters
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
until an empty one is encountered. The macro may be called like this:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
push $20, $21, $32 ; Push 3 ZP locations
|
|
|
|
push $21 ; Push one ZP location
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Local symbols inside macros<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Now, with recursive macros, <tt><ref id=".IFBLANK" name=".IFBLANK"></tt> and
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".PARAMCOUNT" name=".PARAMCOUNT"></tt>, what else do you need?
|
|
|
|
Have a look at the inc16 macro above. Here is it again:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro inc16 addr
|
|
|
|
clc
|
|
|
|
lda addr
|
|
|
|
adc #<$0001
|
|
|
|
sta addr
|
|
|
|
lda addr+1
|
|
|
|
adc #>$0001
|
|
|
|
sta addr+1
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you have a closer look at the code, you will notice, that it could be
|
|
|
|
written more efficiently, like this:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro inc16 addr
|
|
|
|
inc addr
|
|
|
|
bne Skip
|
|
|
|
inc addr+1
|
|
|
|
Skip:
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
But imagine what happens, if you use this macro twice? Since the label "Skip"
|
|
|
|
has the same name both times, you get a "duplicate symbol" error. Without a
|
|
|
|
way to circumvent this problem, macros are not as useful, as they could be.
|
|
|
|
One possible solution is the command <tt><ref id=".LOCAL" name=".LOCAL"></tt>.
|
|
|
|
It declares one or more symbols as local to the macro expansion. The names of
|
|
|
|
local variables are replaced by a unique name in each separate macro
|
|
|
|
expansion. So we can solve the problem above by using <tt/.LOCAL/:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro inc16 addr
|
|
|
|
.local Skip ; Make Skip a local symbol
|
|
|
|
inc addr
|
|
|
|
bne Skip
|
|
|
|
inc addr+1
|
|
|
|
Skip: ; Not visible outside
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Another solution is of course to start a new lexical block inside the macro
|
|
|
|
that hides any labels:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro inc16 addr
|
|
|
|
.proc
|
|
|
|
inc addr
|
|
|
|
bne Skip
|
|
|
|
inc addr+1
|
|
|
|
Skip:
|
|
|
|
.endproc
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>C style macros<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Starting with version 2.5 of the assembler, there is a second macro type
|
|
|
|
available: C style macros using the <tt/.DEFINE/ directive. These macros are
|
|
|
|
similar to the classic macro type described above, but behaviour is sometimes
|
|
|
|
different:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<itemize>
|
|
|
|
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
<item> Macros defined with <tt><ref id=".DEFINE" name=".DEFINE"></tt> may not
|
|
|
|
span more than a line. You may use line continuation (see <tt><ref
|
2023-09-23 15:45:27 +00:00
|
|
|
id="line_continuations" name="line_continuations"></tt>) to spread the
|
|
|
|
definition over more than one line for increased readability, but the
|
|
|
|
macro itself may not contain an end-of-line token.
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<item> Macros defined with <tt><ref id=".DEFINE" name=".DEFINE"></tt> share
|
|
|
|
the name space with classic macros, but they are detected and replaced
|
|
|
|
at the scanner level. While classic macros may be used in every place,
|
|
|
|
where a mnemonic or other directive is allowed, <tt><ref id=".DEFINE"
|
|
|
|
name=".DEFINE"></tt> style macros are allowed anywhere in a line. So
|
|
|
|
they are more versatile in some situations.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<item> <tt><ref id=".DEFINE" name=".DEFINE"></tt> style macros may take
|
|
|
|
parameters. While classic macros may have empty parameters, this is
|
|
|
|
not true for <tt><ref id=".DEFINE" name=".DEFINE"></tt> style macros.
|
|
|
|
For this macro type, the number of actual parameters must match
|
|
|
|
exactly the number of formal parameters.
|
|
|
|
|
2021-04-24 17:20:10 +00:00
|
|
|
To make this possible, formal parameters are enclosed in parentheses when
|
|
|
|
defining the macro. If there are no parameters, the empty parentheses may
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
be omitted.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<item> Since <tt><ref id=".DEFINE" name=".DEFINE"></tt> style macros may not
|
|
|
|
contain end-of-line tokens, there are things that cannot be done. They
|
|
|
|
may not contain several processor instructions for example. So, while
|
|
|
|
some things may be done with both macro types, each type has special
|
|
|
|
usages. The types complement each other.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<item> Parentheses work differently from C macros.
|
|
|
|
The common practice of wrapping C macros in parentheses may cause
|
|
|
|
unintended problems here, such as accidentally implying an
|
|
|
|
indirect addressing mode. While the definition of a macro requires
|
|
|
|
parentheses around its argument list, when invoked they should not be
|
|
|
|
included.
|
2017-05-23 01:33:02 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</itemize>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Let's look at a few examples to make the advantages and disadvantages
|
|
|
|
clear.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To emulate assemblers that use "<tt/EQU/" instead of "<tt/=/" you may use the
|
|
|
|
following <tt/.DEFINE/:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
.define EQU =
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
foo EQU $1234 ; This is accepted now
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may use the directive to define string constants used elsewhere:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
; Define the version number
|
|
|
|
.define VERSION "12.3a"
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
; ... and use it
|
|
|
|
.asciiz VERSION
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Macros with parameters may also be useful:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
.define DEBUG(message) .out message
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
DEBUG "Assembling include file #3"
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
2017-05-23 21:07:45 +00:00
|
|
|
Note that, while formal parameters have to be placed in parentheses,
|
|
|
|
the actual argument used when invoking the macro should not be.
|
2021-04-24 17:20:10 +00:00
|
|
|
The invoked arguments are separated by commas only; if parentheses are
|
|
|
|
used by accident, they will become part of the replaced token.
|
2017-05-23 21:07:45 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you wish to have an expression follow the macro invocation, the
|
|
|
|
last parameter can be enclosed in curly braces {} to indicate the end of that
|
|
|
|
argument.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Examples:
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2017-05-23 01:33:02 +00:00
|
|
|
.define COMBINE(ta,tb,tc) ta+tb*10+tc*100
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2017-05-23 21:07:45 +00:00
|
|
|
.word COMBINE 5,6,7 ; 5+6*10+7*100 = 765
|
|
|
|
.word COMBINE(5,6,7) ; (5+6*10+7)*100 = 7200 ; incorrect use of parentheses
|
|
|
|
.word COMBINE 5,6,7+1 ; 5+6*10+7+1*100 = 172
|
|
|
|
.word COMBINE 5,6,{7}+1 ; 5+6*10+7*100+1 = 766 ; {} encloses the argument
|
|
|
|
.word COMBINE 5,6-2,7 ; 5+6-2*10+7*100 = 691
|
|
|
|
.word COMBINE 5,(6-2),7 ; 5+(6-2)*10+7*100 = 745
|
|
|
|
.word COMBINE 5,6,7+COMBINE 0,1,2 ; 5+6*10+7+0+1*10+2*100*100 = 20082
|
|
|
|
.word COMBINE 5,6,{7}+COMBINE 0,1,2 ; 5+6*10+7*100+0+1*10+2*100 = 975
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
2017-05-23 21:07:45 +00:00
|
|
|
With C macros it is common to enclose the results in parentheses to
|
|
|
|
prevent unintended interactions with the text of the arguments, but
|
|
|
|
additional care must be taken in this assembly context where parentheses
|
|
|
|
may alter the meaning of a statement. In particular, indirect addressing modes
|
|
|
|
may be accidentally implied:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.define DUO(ta,tb) (ta+(tb*10))
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
lda DUO(5,4), Y ; LDA (indirect), Y
|
|
|
|
lda 0+DUO(5,4), Y ; LDA absolute indexed, Y
|
2017-05-23 01:33:02 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Characters in macros<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When using the <ref id="option-t" name="-t"> option, characters are translated
|
|
|
|
into the target character set of the specific machine. However, this happens
|
|
|
|
as late as possible. This means that strings are translated if they are part
|
|
|
|
of a <tt><ref id=".BYTE" name=".BYTE"></tt> or <tt><ref id=".ASCIIZ"
|
|
|
|
name=".ASCIIZ"></tt> command. Characters are translated as soon as they are
|
|
|
|
used as part of an expression.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This behaviour is very intuitive outside of macros but may be confusing when
|
|
|
|
doing more complex macros. If you compare characters against numeric values,
|
|
|
|
be sure to take the translation into account.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Deleting macros<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Macros can be deleted. This will not work if the macro that should be deleted
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
is currently expanded as in the following non-working example:
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro notworking
|
|
|
|
.delmacro notworking
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
notworking ; Will not work
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The commands to delete classic and define style macros differ. Classic macros
|
|
|
|
can be deleted by use of <tt><ref id=".DELMACRO" name=".DELMACRO"></tt>, while
|
|
|
|
for <tt><ref id=".DEFINE" name=".DEFINE"></tt> style macros, <tt><ref
|
|
|
|
id=".UNDEFINE" name=".UNDEFINE"></tt> must be used. Example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
.define value 1
|
|
|
|
.macro mac
|
|
|
|
.byte 2
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
.byte value ; Emit one byte with value 1
|
|
|
|
mac ; Emit another byte with value 2
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
.undefine value
|
|
|
|
.delmacro mac
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
.byte value ; Error: Unknown identifier
|
|
|
|
mac ; Error: Missing ":"
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A separate command for <tt>.DEFINE</tt> style macros was necessary, because
|
|
|
|
the name of such a macro is replaced by its replacement list on a very low
|
|
|
|
level. To get the actual name, macro replacement has to be switched off when
|
|
|
|
reading the argument to <tt>.UNDEFINE</tt>. This does also mean that the
|
|
|
|
argument to <tt>.UNDEFINE</tt> is not allowed to come from another
|
|
|
|
<tt>.DEFINE</tt>. All this is not necessary for classic macros, so having two
|
|
|
|
different commands increases flexibility.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect>Macro packages<label id="macropackages"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Using the <tt><ref id=".MACPACK" name=".MACPACK"></tt> directive, predefined
|
|
|
|
macro packages may be included with just one command. Available macro packages
|
|
|
|
are:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.MACPACK generic</tt><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2019-08-26 19:16:22 +00:00
|
|
|
This macro package defines macros that are useful in almost any program.
|
|
|
|
Currently defined macros are:
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2015-07-29 10:55:50 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro add Arg ; add without carry
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
clc
|
|
|
|
adc Arg
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2015-07-29 10:55:50 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro sub Arg ; subtract without borrow
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
sec
|
|
|
|
sbc Arg
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2015-07-29 10:55:50 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro bge Arg ; branch on greater-than or equal
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
bcs Arg
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
|
|
|
|
2015-07-29 10:55:50 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro blt Arg ; branch on less-than
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
bcc Arg
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
|
|
|
|
2015-07-29 10:55:50 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro bgt Arg ; branch on greater-than
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
.local L
|
|
|
|
beq L
|
|
|
|
bcs Arg
|
|
|
|
L:
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
|
|
|
|
2015-07-29 10:55:50 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro ble Arg ; branch on less-than or equal
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
beq Arg
|
|
|
|
bcc Arg
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:51:39 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2015-07-29 10:55:50 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro bnz Arg ; branch on not zero
|
2014-02-04 21:51:39 +00:00
|
|
|
bne Arg
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
|
|
|
|
2015-07-29 10:55:50 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro bze Arg ; branch on zero
|
2014-02-04 21:51:39 +00:00
|
|
|
beq Arg
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.MACPACK longbranch</tt><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This macro package defines long conditional jumps. They are named like the
|
|
|
|
short counterpart but with the 'b' replaced by a 'j'. Here is a sample
|
|
|
|
definition for the "<tt/jeq/" macro, the other macros are built using the same
|
|
|
|
scheme:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
.macro jeq Target
|
|
|
|
.if .def(Target) .and ((*+2)-(Target) <= 127)
|
|
|
|
beq Target
|
|
|
|
.else
|
|
|
|
bne *+5
|
|
|
|
jmp Target
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
.endmacro
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
All macros expand to a short branch, if the label is already defined (back
|
|
|
|
jump) and is reachable with a short jump. Otherwise the macro expands to a
|
|
|
|
conditional branch with the branch condition inverted, followed by an absolute
|
|
|
|
jump to the actual branch target.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The package defines the following macros:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
jeq, jne, jmi, jpl, jcs, jcc, jvs, jvc
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2016-03-27 16:26:46 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.MACPACK apple2</tt><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This macro package defines a macro named <tt/scrcode/. It takes a string
|
|
|
|
as argument and places this string into memory translated into screen codes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.MACPACK atari</tt><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2014-06-04 21:50:18 +00:00
|
|
|
This macro package defines a macro named <tt/scrcode/. It takes a string
|
|
|
|
as argument and places this string into memory translated into screen codes.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.MACPACK cbm</tt><p>
|
|
|
|
|
2014-06-04 21:50:18 +00:00
|
|
|
This macro package defines a macro named <tt/scrcode/. It takes a string
|
|
|
|
as argument and places this string into memory translated into screen codes.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.MACPACK cpu</tt><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This macro package does not define any macros but constants used to examine
|
|
|
|
the value read from the <tt/<ref id=".CPU" name=".CPU">/ pseudo variable. For
|
|
|
|
each supported CPU a constant similar to
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
CPU_6502
|
|
|
|
CPU_65SC02
|
|
|
|
CPU_65C02
|
|
|
|
CPU_65816
|
|
|
|
CPU_SWEET16
|
|
|
|
CPU_HUC6280
|
2016-09-07 17:21:24 +00:00
|
|
|
CPU_4510
|
2020-11-16 21:16:14 +00:00
|
|
|
CPU_6502DTV
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
is defined. These constants may be used to determine the exact type of the
|
|
|
|
currently enabled CPU. In addition to that, for each CPU instruction set,
|
|
|
|
another constant is defined:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
CPU_ISET_6502
|
|
|
|
CPU_ISET_65SC02
|
|
|
|
CPU_ISET_65C02
|
|
|
|
CPU_ISET_65816
|
|
|
|
CPU_ISET_SWEET16
|
|
|
|
CPU_ISET_HUC6280
|
2016-09-07 17:21:24 +00:00
|
|
|
CPU_ISET_4510
|
2020-11-16 21:16:14 +00:00
|
|
|
CPU_ISET_6502DTV
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The value read from the <tt/<ref id=".CPU" name=".CPU">/ pseudo variable may
|
|
|
|
be checked with <tt/<ref id="operators" name=".BITAND">/ to determine if the
|
|
|
|
currently enabled CPU supports a specific instruction set. For example the
|
|
|
|
65C02 supports all instructions of the 65SC02 CPU, so it has the
|
|
|
|
<tt/CPU_ISET_65SC02/ bit set in addition to its native <tt/CPU_ISET_65C02/
|
|
|
|
bit. Using
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.if (.cpu .bitand CPU_ISET_65SC02)
|
|
|
|
lda (sp)
|
|
|
|
.else
|
|
|
|
ldy #$00
|
|
|
|
lda (sp),y
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
it is possible to determine if the
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
lda (sp)
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
instruction is supported, which is the case for the 65SC02, 65C02 and 65816
|
|
|
|
CPUs (the latter two are upwards compatible to the 65SC02).
|
|
|
|
|
2015-11-17 19:11:30 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-06-04 21:50:18 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1><tt>.MACPACK module</tt><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This macro package defines a macro named <tt/module_header/. It takes an
|
|
|
|
identifier as argument and is used to define the header of a module both
|
|
|
|
in the dynamic and static variant.
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect>Predefined constants<label id="predefined-constants"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For better orthogonality, the assembler defines similar symbols as the
|
|
|
|
compiler, depending on the target system selected:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<itemize>
|
2014-02-04 21:51:39 +00:00
|
|
|
<item><tt/__APPLE2__/ - Target system is <tt/apple2/ or <tt/apple2enh/
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<item><tt/__APPLE2ENH__/ - Target system is <tt/apple2enh/
|
2017-01-11 22:12:30 +00:00
|
|
|
<item><tt/__ATARI2600__/ - Target system is <tt/atari2600/
|
2014-05-16 00:26:20 +00:00
|
|
|
<item><tt/__ATARI5200__/ - Target system is <tt/atari5200/
|
2022-03-01 04:44:55 +00:00
|
|
|
<item><tt/__ATARI7800__/ - Target system is <tt/atari7800/
|
2014-02-04 21:51:39 +00:00
|
|
|
<item><tt/__ATARI__/ - Target system is <tt/atari/ or <tt/atarixl/
|
|
|
|
<item><tt/__ATARIXL__/ - Target system is <tt/atarixl/
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<item><tt/__ATMOS__/ - Target system is <tt/atmos/
|
|
|
|
<item><tt/__BBC__/ - Target system is <tt/bbc/
|
|
|
|
<item><tt/__C128__/ - Target system is <tt/c128/
|
2014-02-04 21:51:39 +00:00
|
|
|
<item><tt/__C16__/ - Target system is <tt/c16/ or <tt/plus4/
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<item><tt/__C64__/ - Target system is <tt/c64/
|
2019-09-27 07:38:51 +00:00
|
|
|
<item><tt/__CBM__/ - Target is a Commodore or Commodore-alike system
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<item><tt/__CBM510__/ - Target system is <tt/cbm510/
|
|
|
|
<item><tt/__CBM610__/ - Target system is <tt/cbm610/
|
2019-09-27 07:38:51 +00:00
|
|
|
<item><tt/__CX16__/ - Target system is <tt/cx16/
|
2014-02-04 21:51:39 +00:00
|
|
|
<item><tt/__GEOS__/ - Target is a GEOS system
|
|
|
|
<item><tt/__GEOS_APPLE__/ - Target system is <tt/geos-apple/
|
|
|
|
<item><tt/__GEOS_CBM__/ - Target system is <tt/geos-cbm/
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<item><tt/__LUNIX__/ - Target system is <tt/lunix/
|
2014-02-04 21:51:39 +00:00
|
|
|
<item><tt/__LYNX__/ - Target system is <tt/lynx/
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<item><tt/__NES__/ - Target system is <tt/nes/
|
2015-03-23 18:31:46 +00:00
|
|
|
<item><tt/__OSIC1P__/ - Target system is <tt/osic1p/
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<item><tt/__PET__/ - Target system is <tt/pet/
|
|
|
|
<item><tt/__PLUS4__/ - Target system is <tt/plus4/
|
2014-02-04 21:51:39 +00:00
|
|
|
<item><tt/__SIM6502__/ - Target system is <tt/sim6502/
|
|
|
|
<item><tt/__SIM65C02__/ - Target system is <tt/sim65c02/
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<item><tt/__SUPERVISION__/ - Target system is <tt/supervision/
|
2021-06-06 22:20:54 +00:00
|
|
|
<item><tt/__SYM1__/ - Target system is <tt/sym1/
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<item><tt/__VIC20__/ - Target system is <tt/vic20/
|
|
|
|
</itemize>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect>Structs and unions<label id="structs"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Structs and unions Overview<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Structs and unions are special forms of <ref id="scopes" name="scopes">. They
|
2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
are, to some degree, comparable to their C counterparts. Both have a list of
|
2023-12-17 00:18:25 +00:00
|
|
|
members. Each member allocates storage, and optionally may have a name.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Each named member has a constant value equal to the storage offset from the
|
|
|
|
beginning of the structure. In the case of a union, all members are placed at
|
|
|
|
the same offset, typically 0.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2023-12-17 00:18:25 +00:00
|
|
|
Each named member also has a storage size which can be accessed with the
|
2023-12-17 00:32:52 +00:00
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".SIZEOF" name=".SIZEOF"></tt> operator. The struct or union itself
|
|
|
|
also has a <tt/.SIZEOF/ indicating its total storage size.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Declaration<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here is an example for a very simple struct with two members and a total size
|
|
|
|
of 4 bytes:
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.struct Point
|
|
|
|
xcoord .word
|
|
|
|
ycoord .word
|
|
|
|
.endstruct
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
A union shares the total space between all its members; its size is the same
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
as that of the largest member. The offset of all members relative to the union
|
|
|
|
is zero.
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.union Entry
|
|
|
|
index .word
|
|
|
|
ptr .addr
|
|
|
|
.endunion
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
A struct or union may not necessarily have a name. If it is anonymous, no
|
|
|
|
local scope is opened; the identifiers used to name the members are placed
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
into the current scope instead.
|
|
|
|
|
2023-12-17 00:18:25 +00:00
|
|
|
Storage allocators may contain a multiplier. A struct may also contain members
|
|
|
|
and definitions of local structs/unions. Example:
|
|
|
|
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.struct Circle
|
|
|
|
.struct Point
|
|
|
|
.word 2 ; Allocate two words
|
|
|
|
.endstruct
|
|
|
|
Radius .word
|
|
|
|
.endstruct
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
2023-12-17 00:18:25 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In this example the size of the Circle struct is 6 (three words).
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
<sect1>The storage allocator keywords<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<descrip>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tag/.BYTE, .RES/
|
|
|
|
Allocates multiples of 1 byte. <tt/.RES/ requires an operand.
|
|
|
|
|
2023-12-17 00:18:25 +00:00
|
|
|
<tag/.DBYT, .WORD, .ADDR/
|
2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
Allocates multiples of 2 bytes.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
<tag/.FARADDR/
|
|
|
|
Allocates multiples of 3 bytes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tag/.DWORD/
|
|
|
|
Allocates multiples of 4 bytes.
|
|
|
|
|
2023-12-17 00:18:25 +00:00
|
|
|
<tag/.TAG/
|
|
|
|
Allocates a previously defined struct.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tag/.STRUCT, .UNION/
|
|
|
|
Begins a nested .struct or .union definition, and allocates it.
|
|
|
|
Note that its member offset values will begin at 0, unless this nested
|
|
|
|
structure is anonymous, in which case they will instead become members of
|
|
|
|
the enclosing scope.
|
|
|
|
|
2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
</descrip>
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>The <tt/.ORG/ keyword<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The <tt/.ORG/ keyword changes the offset value that is assigned to subsequent
|
|
|
|
member names. It's useful when using a struct to define the names of the
|
|
|
|
registers in an I/O chip. Example:
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
; 6551
|
|
|
|
.struct ACIA ; Asynchronous Communications Interface Adapter
|
|
|
|
.org $031C
|
|
|
|
DATA .byte
|
|
|
|
STATUS .byte
|
|
|
|
CMD .byte ; Command register
|
|
|
|
CTRL .byte ; Control register
|
|
|
|
.endstruct
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
lda ACIA::DATA ; Get an RS-232 character
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>The <tt/.TAG/ keyword<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
By using the <ref id=".TAG" name=".TAG"> keyword, it is possible to reserve
|
|
|
|
space for an already defined struct or union within another struct:
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.struct Point
|
|
|
|
xcoord .word
|
|
|
|
ycoord .word
|
|
|
|
.endstruct
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.struct Circle
|
|
|
|
Origin .tag Point
|
|
|
|
Radius .byte
|
|
|
|
.endstruct
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
Actual space for a struct or union may be allocated by using the <ref id=".TAG"
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
name=".TAG"> directive.
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
C: .tag Circle
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
2023-12-17 00:18:25 +00:00
|
|
|
Members are just offsets from the start of the struct or union. To
|
2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
access a field of a struct, the member offset must be added to the address of
|
|
|
|
the struct variable itself:
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
2023-12-17 00:18:25 +00:00
|
|
|
lda C + Circle::Radius ; Load circle radius
|
|
|
|
lda C + Circle::Origin + Point::ycoord ; Load circle origin.ycoord
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
2023-12-17 00:18:25 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Nested structures or unions are treated differently depending on whether they
|
|
|
|
are anonymous. If named, a new structure definition is created within the
|
|
|
|
enclosing scope, with its offsets beginning at 0. If anonymous, the members of
|
2023-12-17 10:01:06 +00:00
|
|
|
the new structure are added to the enclosing scope instead, with offsets
|
|
|
|
continuing through that scope. Example:
|
2023-12-17 00:18:25 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.struct Object
|
2023-12-17 10:40:00 +00:00
|
|
|
id .byte ; Object::id = 0
|
|
|
|
target .struct Point ; Object::target = 1
|
2023-12-17 00:18:25 +00:00
|
|
|
xcoord .word ; Object::Point::xcoord = 0
|
|
|
|
ycoord .word ; Object::Point::ycoord = 2
|
|
|
|
.endstruct
|
2023-12-17 10:40:00 +00:00
|
|
|
cost .struct ; Object::cost = 5
|
|
|
|
price .word ; Object::price = 5
|
|
|
|
tax .word ; Object::tax = 7
|
2023-12-17 00:18:25 +00:00
|
|
|
.endstruct
|
|
|
|
.struct
|
2023-12-17 10:40:00 +00:00
|
|
|
radius .word ; Object::radius = 9
|
2023-12-17 00:18:25 +00:00
|
|
|
.endstruct
|
|
|
|
.endstruct
|
|
|
|
|
2023-12-17 00:52:57 +00:00
|
|
|
O: .tag Object
|
2023-12-17 10:40:00 +00:00
|
|
|
lda O + Object::target + Object::Point::ycoord ; Named struct
|
|
|
|
lda O + Object::tax ; Anonymous
|
|
|
|
lda O + Object::radius ; Anonymous
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
; Be careful not to use a named nested structure without also adding the
|
|
|
|
; offset to the nested structure itself.
|
|
|
|
lda O + Object::Point::ycoord ; Incorrect!
|
|
|
|
lda O + Object::target + Object::Point::ycoord ; Correct
|
2023-12-17 00:18:25 +00:00
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In this example, the first nested structure is named "Point", and its member
|
|
|
|
offsets begin at 0. On the other hand, the two anonymous structures simply
|
2023-12-17 10:01:06 +00:00
|
|
|
continue to add members to the enclosing "Object" structure.
|
2023-12-17 00:18:25 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that an anonymous structure does not need a member name, since all of its
|
2023-12-17 10:40:00 +00:00
|
|
|
members become part of the enclosing structure. The "cost" member in the
|
|
|
|
example is redundantly the same offset as its first member "price".
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Limitations<p>
|
|
|
|
|
2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
Structs and unions currently are implemented as nested symbol tables (in fact,
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
they were a by-product of the improved scoping rules). Currently, the
|
2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
assembler has no idea of types. That means that the <ref id=".TAG"
|
|
|
|
name=".TAG"> keyword only will allocate space. You won't be able to initialize
|
|
|
|
variables declared with <ref id=".TAG" name=".TAG">; and, adding an embedded
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
structure to another structure with <ref id=".TAG" name=".TAG"> will not make
|
2019-09-11 21:55:49 +00:00
|
|
|
that added structure accessible by using the '::' operator.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect>Module constructors/destructors<label id="condes"><p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<em>Note:</em> This section applies mostly to C programs, so the explanation
|
|
|
|
below uses examples from the C libraries. However, the feature may also be
|
|
|
|
useful for assembler programs.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Module constructors/destructors Overview<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Using the <tt><ref id=".CONSTRUCTOR" name=".CONSTRUCTOR"></tt>, <tt><ref
|
|
|
|
id=".DESTRUCTOR" name=".DESTRUCTOR"></tt> and <tt><ref id=".INTERRUPTOR"
|
|
|
|
name=".INTERRUPTOR"></tt> keywords it is possible to export functions in a
|
|
|
|
special way. The linker is able to generate tables with all functions of a
|
|
|
|
specific type. Such a table will <em>only</em> include symbols from object
|
|
|
|
files that are linked into a specific executable. This may be used to add
|
|
|
|
initialization and cleanup code for library modules, or a table of interrupt
|
|
|
|
handler functions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The C heap functions are an example where module initialization code is used.
|
|
|
|
All heap functions (<tt>malloc</tt>, <tt>free</tt>, ...) work with a few
|
|
|
|
variables that contain the start and the end of the heap, pointers to the free
|
|
|
|
list and so on. Since the end of the heap depends on the size and start of the
|
|
|
|
stack, it must be initialized at runtime. However, initializing these
|
|
|
|
variables for programs that do not use the heap are a waste of time and
|
|
|
|
memory.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
So the central module defines a function that contains initialization code and
|
|
|
|
exports this function using the <tt/.CONSTRUCTOR/ statement. If (and only if)
|
|
|
|
this module is added to an executable by the linker, the initialization
|
|
|
|
function will be placed into the table of constructors by the linker. The C
|
|
|
|
startup code will call all constructors before <tt/main/ and all destructors
|
|
|
|
after <tt/main/, so without any further work, the heap initialization code is
|
|
|
|
called once the module is linked in.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
While it would be possible to add explicit calls to initialization functions
|
|
|
|
in the startup code, the new approach has several advantages:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<enum>
|
|
|
|
<item>
|
|
|
|
If a module is not included, the initialization code is not linked in and not
|
|
|
|
called. So you don't pay for things you don't need.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<item>
|
|
|
|
Adding another library that needs initialization does not mean that the
|
|
|
|
startup code has to be changed. Before we had module constructors and
|
|
|
|
destructors, the startup code for all systems had to be adjusted to call the
|
|
|
|
new initialization code.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<item>
|
|
|
|
The feature saves memory: Each additional initialization function needs just
|
|
|
|
two bytes in the table (a pointer to the function).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</enum>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Calling order<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The symbols are sorted in increasing priority order by the linker when using
|
|
|
|
one of the builtin linker configurations, so the functions with lower
|
|
|
|
priorities come first and are followed by those with higher priorities. The C
|
|
|
|
library runtime subroutine that walks over the function tables calls the
|
|
|
|
functions starting from the top of the table - which means that functions with
|
|
|
|
a high priority are called first.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
So when using the C runtime, functions are called with high priority functions
|
|
|
|
first, followed by low priority functions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>Pitfalls<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When using these special symbols, please take care of the following:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<itemize>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<item>
|
|
|
|
The linker will only generate function tables, it will not generate code to
|
|
|
|
call these functions. If you're using the feature in some other than the
|
|
|
|
existing C environments, you have to write code to call all functions in a
|
|
|
|
linker generated table yourself. See the <tt/condes/ and <tt/callirq/ modules
|
|
|
|
in the C runtime for an example on how to do this.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<item>
|
|
|
|
The linker will only add addresses of functions that are in modules linked to
|
|
|
|
the executable. This means that you have to be careful where to place the
|
|
|
|
condes functions. If initialization or an irq handler is needed for a group of
|
|
|
|
functions, be sure to place the function into a module that is linked in
|
|
|
|
regardless of which function is called by the user.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<item>
|
|
|
|
The linker will generate the tables only when requested to do so by the
|
|
|
|
<tt/FEATURE CONDES/ statement in the linker config file. Each table has to
|
|
|
|
be requested separately.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<item>
|
|
|
|
Constructors and destructors may have priorities. These priorities determine
|
|
|
|
the order of the functions in the table. If your initialization or cleanup code
|
|
|
|
does depend on other initialization or cleanup code, you have to choose the
|
|
|
|
priority for the functions accordingly.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<item>
|
|
|
|
Besides the <tt><ref id=".CONSTRUCTOR" name=".CONSTRUCTOR"></tt>, <tt><ref
|
|
|
|
id=".DESTRUCTOR" name=".DESTRUCTOR"></tt> and <tt><ref id=".INTERRUPTOR"
|
|
|
|
name=".INTERRUPTOR"></tt> statements, there is also a more generic command:
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".CONDES" name=".CONDES"></tt>. This allows to specify an
|
|
|
|
additional type. Predefined types are 0 (constructor), 1 (destructor) and 2
|
|
|
|
(interruptor). The linker generates a separate table for each type on request.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</itemize>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect>Porting sources from other assemblers<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sometimes it is necessary to port code written for older assemblers to ca65.
|
|
|
|
In some cases, this can be done without any changes to the source code by
|
|
|
|
using the emulation features of ca65 (see <tt><ref id=".FEATURE"
|
|
|
|
name=".FEATURE"></tt>). In other cases, it is necessary to make changes to the
|
|
|
|
source code.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Probably the biggest difference is the handling of the <tt><ref id=".ORG"
|
|
|
|
name=".ORG"></tt> directive. ca65 generates relocatable code, and placement is
|
|
|
|
done by the linker. Most other assemblers generate absolute code, placement is
|
|
|
|
done within the assembler and there is no external linker.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In general it is not a good idea to write new code using the emulation
|
|
|
|
features of the assembler, but there may be situations where even this rule is
|
|
|
|
not valid.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect1>TASS<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You need to use some of the ca65 emulation features to simulate the behaviour
|
|
|
|
of such simple assemblers.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<enum>
|
|
|
|
<item>Prepare your sourcecode like this:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
; if you want TASS style labels without colons
|
|
|
|
.feature labels_without_colons
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
; if you want TASS style character constants
|
|
|
|
; ("a" instead of the default 'a')
|
|
|
|
.feature loose_char_term
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.word *+2 ; the cbm load address
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
[yourcode here]
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
notice that the two emulation features are mostly useful for porting
|
|
|
|
sources originally written in/for TASS, they are not needed for the
|
|
|
|
actual "simple assembler operation" and are not recommended if you are
|
|
|
|
writing new code from scratch.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<item>Replace all program counter assignments (which are not possible in ca65
|
|
|
|
by default, and the respective emulation feature works different from what
|
|
|
|
you'd expect) by another way to skip to memory locations, for example the
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".RES" name=".RES"></tt> directive.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
; *=$2000
|
|
|
|
.res $2000-* ; reserve memory up to $2000
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please note that other than the original TASS, ca65 can never move the program
|
|
|
|
counter backwards - think of it as if you are assembling to disk with TASS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<item>Conditional assembly (<tt/.ifeq//<tt/.endif//<tt/.goto/ etc.) must be
|
|
|
|
rewritten to match ca65 syntax. Most importantly notice that due to the lack
|
|
|
|
of <tt/.goto/, everything involving loops must be replaced by
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".REPEAT" name=".REPEAT"></tt>.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<item>To assemble code to a different address than it is executed at, use the
|
|
|
|
<tt><ref id=".ORG" name=".ORG"></tt> directive instead of
|
|
|
|
<tt/.offs/-constructs.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
.org $1800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
[floppy code here]
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.reloc ; back to normal
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<item>Then assemble like this:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<tscreen><verb>
|
|
|
|
cl65 --start-addr 0x0ffe -t none myprog.s -o myprog.prg
|
|
|
|
</verb></tscreen>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that you need to use the actual start address minus two, since two bytes
|
|
|
|
are used for the cbm load address.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</enum>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<sect>Copyright<p>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
ca65 (and all cc65 binutils) are (C) Copyright 1998-2003 Ullrich von
|
|
|
|
Bassewitz. For usage of the binaries and/or sources the following
|
|
|
|
conditions do apply:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This software is provided 'as-is', without any expressed or implied
|
|
|
|
warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages
|
|
|
|
arising from the use of this software.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose,
|
|
|
|
including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it
|
|
|
|
freely, subject to the following restrictions:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<enum>
|
2019-02-12 21:50:49 +00:00
|
|
|
<item> The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not
|
|
|
|
claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software
|
|
|
|
in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be
|
|
|
|
appreciated but is not required.
|
|
|
|
<item> Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not
|
|
|
|
be misrepresented as being the original software.
|
|
|
|
<item> This notice may not be removed or altered from any source
|
|
|
|
distribution.
|
2014-02-04 21:18:58 +00:00
|
|
|
</enum>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
</article>
|